BS-300 Chemist ry An aly zer
Operation Manual
© 2007 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved. For this Operation Manual, the issued Date is 2007-07 (Version: 1.8).
Intellectual Property Statement SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray does not assume any liability arising out of any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties. Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden. Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
,
,
,
,
aretheregistered
trademarks or trademarks owned by manual Mindrayare in used Chinaonly andfor other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this editorial purposes without the intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their respective owners.
Respo nsi bil ity o n the M anuf actu rer Party Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice. All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual. Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
I
WARNING: It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or injury of human health.
Warranty THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel. This warranty shall not extend to:
any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's srcinal serial number tag or product identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
Retur n Poli cy Return Procedure In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to Mindray, the following procedure should be followed: 1
Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Customer Service Department and obtain a Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must appear on the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be accepted if the Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model number, serial number, and a brief description of the reason for return.
2
Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product is shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges).
3
Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by Customer Service department.
II
Company Contact Manufacturer: Ad dress:
Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial Park, Nanshan, ShenZhen518057, P.R.China
Tel:
+86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax:
+86 755 26582934 26582500
III
Preface
Who Shoul d Read This Manual This manual is written for clinical laboratory professionals to:
learn about the BS-300 hardware and software set up and operate the BS-300
maintain and troubleshoot the BS-300
WARNING: The BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer is to be operated only by clinical professionals, doctors or laboratory experimenters trained and authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized distributors.
What Ca n You Find i n Thi s Manual The BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer should be operated and serviced strictly as instructed by this manual. This manual contains 7 chapters, plus 3 appendixes: 1
System Description
2
Installation
3
Basic Operations
4
Advanced Operations
5
Maintenance
6
Troubleshooting
7
Calculation Methods
Appendix A
Specifications
Appendix B
Supplies
Appendix C
Index
Conventions Used i n This Manual This manual uses certain typographical conventions to clarify meanings in the text. All capital, italic font indicates a key name, such as ENTER. Bold font indicates a chapter title, such as 5 Maintenance
1
Preface Bold and Italic font indicates:
Screen text displayed by the analyzer, such as Can’t save .
A menu name, such as Setup .
A screen field or value, such as Method .
Safety Symbols This chart explains the symbols used in this manual. When you see …
Then …
WARNING:
Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is alerting you to an operating hazard that can cause personal injury.
BIOHAZARD:
Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is alerting you to a potentially biohazardous condition.
CAUTION:
Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is alerting you to a possibility of system damage or unreliable results.
NOTE:
Read the statement following the symbol. The statement is alerting you to information that requires your attention.
Labels Used on the System The labels attached to some panels use symbols with the text to clarify the meaning of the text. If any of the labels peels off, contact Mindray customer service department or your local distributor for replacement. The table below explains the symbols on the labels. Serial Number Manufacturer Date of Manufacture
Authorized Representative in the European Community The device is fully in conformance with the Council Directive Concerning In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices 98/79/EC.
2
Preface The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU member states only: The use of this symbol indicates that this product should not be treated as household waste. By ensuring that this product is disposed of correctly, you will help prevent bringing potential negative consequences to the environment and human health. For more detailed information with regard to returning and recycling this product, please consult the distributor from whom you purchased the product. In Vitro Diagnostic equipment
Biohazard Warning: risk of potentially biohazardous infection
Warning: risk of personal injury or equipment damage
Warning: risk of electric shock
Warning: risk of burn
Warning: risk of eye hurt
ON (POWER) OFF (POWER) ON (ANALYZING UNIT POWER)
OFF (ANALYZING UNIT POWER) ～
Alternating current (AC)
Graphics All graphics, including screens and printout, are for illustration purposes only and must not be used for any other purpose.
EC Representative Name:
Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)
Ad dress:
Eiffestraβe 80, 20537 Hamburg Germany
Phone:
0049-40-2513175
Fax:
0049-40-255726
3
Preface
Safety Preca uti ons Observe the following safety precautions when using the BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer. Ignoring any of these safety precautions may lead to personal injury or equipment damage.
WARNING: If the system is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
Preventing Electric Shocks WARNING: When the POWER is on, users must not open the rear or side cover. Spillage of reagent or sample on the analyzer may cause equipment failure and even electric shock. Do not place sample and reagent on the analyzer. In case of liquid ingression, shutspillage, switch off the power suppliesimmediately, remove the spillage and contact Mindray Customer Service Departmentcustomer service department or your local distributor.
Preventing Personal Injury WARNING: Do not touch such moving parts as sample probe, reagent probe and mixing bar, when the analyzer is in operation. Do not put your finger or hand into any open part when the analyzer is in operation. If you want to replace the photometer lamp, first switch off the POWER and then wait at least 15 minutes for the lamp to cool down before touching it. Do not touch the lamp before it cools down, or you may get burned.
Eye Protection WARNING: Light sent by the photometer lamp or the bar code scanner may hurt your eyes. Do not stare into the lamp or the laser beam from the bar code scanner when the analyzer is in operation.
4
Preface
Preventing Infe ction BIOHAZARD: Inappropriately handling samples may lead to biohazardous infection. Do not touch the sample, mixture or waste with your hands. Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles. In case your skin contacts the sample, follow standard laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.
Handl ing Reagents and Wa sh Solu tio n WARNING: Reagents and wash solution are corrosive to human skins. Exercise caution when using the reagents. In case your skin or clothes contact the reagents, wash them off with soap and clean water. In case the reagents spill into your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an oculist.
Treating Wa ste Li quid s BIOHAZARD: Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer or distributor of the reagents for details.
Treating Waste Analyzer Please observe the following instructions to dispose of the waste analyzer.
WARNING Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations. Dispose of the waste analyzer in accordance with your local or national guidelines for waste disposal.
Preventing Fire or Explosion WARNING: Ethanol is flammable substance around the analyzer. Please exercise caution while using the ethanol.
5
Preface
Precautions on Use To use the analyzer safely and effectively, pay attention to the following operation notes.
Intended Use
WARNING:
The BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer (hereinafter referred to as the BS-300) is a chemistry system that is designed for the in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, CSF and other samples. Please consult Mindray first if you want to use the BS-300 for other purposes. To draw a clinical conclusion, please also refer to the patient’s clinical symptom and other test results.
Operator WARNING: The BS-300 is to be operated only by clinical professionals, doctors or laboratory experimenters trained and authorized by Mindray or Mindray-authorized distributors.
Environment CAUTION: Please install and operate the analyzer in an environment specified by this manual. Installing and operating the analyzer in other environment may lead to unreliable results and even equipment damage. To relocate the analyzer, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Preve nti ng Interference by Ele ctr omagnetic Nois e CAUTION: Electromagnetic noise may interfere with operation of the analyzer. Do not install devices generating excessive noiseoraround the analyzer. Do not use such deviceselectromagnetic as mobile phones radio transmitters in the room housing the analyzer. Do not use other CRT displays around the analyzer. The analyzing unit is designed and tested to EN 61326:2003 Class A. In a domestic environment it may cause radio interference, so you may need to take measures to mitigate the interference. Do not use other medical instruments around the analyzer that may generate electromagnetic noise to interfere with their operations.
6
Preface
Operating the BS-300 CAUTION: Operate the BS-300 strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate use of the analyzer may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment damage or personal injury. Before using the system for the first time, run the calibration program and the QC program to make sure it is in a proper state. Be sure to run the QC program every time you use the system, otherwise the result man be unreliable. Do not open the sample disk or reagent disk cover when the analyzer is operating. The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is to be used for connection with the operation unit only. Do not use it for other purposes. Only use the supplied cable for the connection. The operation unit is a personal computer with the analyzer control system installed. Installing other software or hardware on this computer may interfere with the system operation. Do not run other software when the system is working. Do not use this computer for other purposes. Inappropriate use of this computer may introduce computer virus, which may spread through floppy disks, software or network, into the system. Do not touch the display, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands with chemicals on them. Don’t placeotherwise the POWER ON again since placing it to OFF, the to system may within enter 10 theseconds protection status. If it does so, place the POWER to OFF and place it to ON again.
Maintaining the BS-300 CAUTION: Maintain the BS-300 strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate maintenance may lead to equipment damage or personal injury. To wipe off dust from the analyzer surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not too wet) cloth, soaked with soap water if necessary, to clean the surface. Do not use such organic solvents as ethanol for the cleaning. After cleaning, wipe the surface dry with dry cloth. Switch off all the powers and disconnect the power plug before cleaning. Take necessary measures to prevent water ingression into the system, otherwise it may lead to equipment damage or personal injury. Replacements of such major parts as the photometer, sample probe, reagent probe, mixing bar and syringe plungers must be followed by a calibration.
7
Preface
Samples CAUTION: Use serum samples that are completely separated from blood clots or urine samples that are free from suspended matter. If fibrin exists in the serum samples or suspended matter exist in the urine samples, the sample probe may be blocked. Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to unreliable test results. Hemolysis, jaundice or chylomicron in the samples may lead to unreliable test results, so sample blanks are recommended Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the compositions of the samples and lead to unreliable results. Sample volatilization may lead to unreliable results. Do not leave the sample open for too long. Not all the tests the reagents claim capable of analyzing can be analyzed on the analyzer. Consult the reagent suppliers for detailed information. Certain samples need to be processed before being analyzed by the analyzer. Consult the reagent suppliers for details. The analyzer has a specific requirement on the minimum sample volume. Refer to this manual for the proper sample volume. Load the sample to proper tube positions on the sample disk before the analysis begins; otherwise you will not obtain correct results.
Reagents, Calib rators and Contr ols CAUTION: Use proper reagents, calibrators and controls in the analyzer. Select appropriate reagents according to the performance characteristics of the analyzer. Consult the reagent supplier or Mindray-authorized distributor for details when you are not sure about your reagent choice. Store and use the reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by the suppliers. Otherwise, you may not obtain reliable results or the best performance of the analyzer. Perform calibration after changing the reagents. Otherwise, you may not obtain reliable results. Contamination among reagents by carryover may lead to unreliable test results. Consult the reagent supplier for details.
8
Preface
Setting up BS-300 CAUTION: You need to set up the analyzer strictly as instructed by this manual before using it. To define such parameters as sample volume, reagent volume and wavelength, consult instructions of reagents.
Backing Up Data NOTE:
The analyzer automatically backs up the data to the built-in hard disk. However, data loss is still possible due to mis-deletion or physical damage of the disk. Mindray recommends you regularly back up the data to such medium as CDs.
Computer and Printer NOTE: Refer to their user’s manuals for details.
External Equipment WARNING: External equipment connected to the system, such as PC and printer, shall be consistent with IEC 60950 or EN 60950.
9
Contents Preface.......................................................................................................................................... 1 Who Should Read This Manual ............................................................................................. 1 What Can You Find in This Manual........................................................................................ 1 Conventions Used in This Manual ......................................................................................... 1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................. 4 Precautions on Use................................................................................................................ 6 Con tents ........................................................................................................................................ i 1
Syst em Descr ip ti on ..........................................................................................................1-1 1.1
1.2
2
Install ati on .........................................................................................................................2-1 2.1 2.2
Unpacking............................................................................................................2-1 Installation Requirements ....................................................................................2-1
2.3
2.2.1 Installation Environment Requirements................................................2-1 2.2.2 Power Requirements............................................................................2-2 2.2.3 Temperature and Humidity Requirements............................................2-2 2.2.4 Water Supply and Drain Requirements................................................2-3 2.2.5 Space and Accessibility Requirements.................................................2-3 Connecting the Tanks ..........................................................................................2-4 2.3.1 Connecting the Deionized Water Tank .................................................2-4 2.3.2 Connecting the Waste Tank..................................................................2-4 ISE Unit (optional) Installation .............................................................................2-5 2.4.1 Installing Electrodes .............................................................................2-6 2.4.2 Installing Reagent Module....................................................................2-8
2.4
3
Hardware Introduction .........................................................................................1-1 1.1.1 Analyzing Unit ......................................................................................1-2 1.1.2 Operation Unit ....................................................................................1-16 1.1.3 Output Unit .........................................................................................1-16 Software Introduction.........................................................................................1-17 1.2.1 Software Interface ..............................................................................1-17 1.2.2 Main Interface Components ...............................................................1-18 1.2.3 Mouse Operations ..............................................................................1-21
Basic Operat io ns .............................................................................................................. 3-1 3.1 3.2
3.3
3.4
Daily Procedure ................................................................................................... 3-1 Preparing for Analysis..........................................................................................3-2 3.2.1 Checking before Startup.......................................................................3-2 3.2.2 Power-on ..............................................................................................3-3 3.2.3 Starting the Operating Software ...........................................................3-3 3.2.4 Setting Up the BS-300..........................................................................3-4 3.2.5 Preparing for Analysis ..........................................................................3-5 Starting Analysis .................................................................................................. 3-5 3.3.1 Calibration ............................................................................................3-5 3.3.2 QC ........................................................................................................ 3-6 3.3.3 Samples................................................................................................3-6 3.3.4 Editing Results of Sample Runs...........................................................3-7 3.3.5 Printing Results of Sample Runs..........................................................3-7 Finishing Analysis ................................................................................................3-7 3.4.1 Exiting the Operating Software.............................................................3-7 3.4.2 Shutdown..............................................................................................3-8
i
Contents 3.4.3 4
Ad vanced Operat io ns ....................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
5
Checking after Shutdown .....................................................................3-8
Routine ................................................................................................................ 4-1 4.1.1 Samples................................................................................................4-1 4.1.2 Calibration .......................................................................................... 4-11 4.1.3 QC ...................................................................................................... 4-13 4.1.4 Status..................................................................................................4-14 4.1.5 Start .................................................................................................... 4-34 4.1.6 Probe Stop..........................................................................................4-37 4.1.7 Stop .................................................................................................... 4-38 4.1.8 Exit......................................................................................................4-38 4.1.9 Emergency Exit ..................................................................................4-39 Parameters ........................................................................................................ 4-39 4.2.1 Assay..................................................................................................4-39 4.2.2 Reagent..............................................................................................4-61 4.2.3 Calibration ..........................................................................................4-67 4.2.4 QC ...................................................................................................... 4-87 Data ................................................................................................................. 4-108 4.3.1 Export ...............................................................................................4-108 4.3.2 Import ............................................................................................... 4-112 4.3.3 Demographics .................................................................................. 4-114 4.3.4 Result ............................................................................................... 4-116 System.............................................................................................................4-130 4.4.1 System Status...................................................................................4-130 4.4.2 Setup ................................................................................................ 4-133 4.4.3 Hospital.............................................................................................4-141 4.4.4 User ..................................................................................................4-146 4.4.5 Log....................................................................................................4-150 4.4.6 Maintenance.....................................................................................4-152 4.4.7 Print ..................................................................................................4-165 4.4.8 Temperature .....................................................................................4-171 4.4.9 Database ..........................................................................................4-173 4.4.10 Bar Code Scanner............................................................................4-175 4.4.11 ISE Unit ............................................................................................4-176 Help .................................................................................................................4-181 4.5.1 Version..............................................................................................4-181 4.5.2 Guide................................................................................................4-181
Maint enanc e ......................................................................................................................5-1 5.1 5.2
5.3
Preparation .......................................................................................................... 5-1 Daily Maintenance ...............................................................................................5-2 5.2.1 Checking Sample/Reagent Syringes ...................................................5-2 5.2.2 Checking/Washing Sample Probe........................................................5-3 5.2.3 Checking/Washing Reagent Probe ......................................................5-4 5.2.4 Checking/Washing Mixing Bar .............................................................5-4 5.2.5 Checking Detergents............................................................................5-4 5.2.6 Checking Connection of Deionized Water............................................5-5 5.2.7 Checking Connection of Wastewater ...................................................5-6 5.2.8 Checking Remaining Deionized Water.................................................5-8 5.2.9 Emptying Waste Tank...........................................................................5-8 5.2.10 Emptying Used-Cuvettes Bucket .........................................................5-9 5.2.11 Cleaning ISE Unit (optional)...............................................................5-10 5.2.12 Pump Calibration (optional)................................................................5-10 Weekly Maintenance ......................................................................................... 5-11 5.3.1 Washing Sample Probe...................................................................... 5-11 5.3.2 Washing Reagent Probe ....................................................................5-13 5.3.3 Washing Mixing Bar............................................................................5-15 5.3.4 Washing Deionized Water Tank .........................................................5-16
ii
Contents
5.4
5.5 5.6
5.7 6
5.3.5 Washing Waste Tank..........................................................................5-17 5.3.6 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment .................................................5-18 5.3.7 Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment................................................5-19 5.3.8 Cleaning Panel of Analyzing Unit .......................................................5-20 Monthly Maintenance ........................................................................................5-21 5.4.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe ...............................................5-21 5.4.2 Cleaning Wash Well of Reagent Probe..............................................5-21 5.4.3 Cleaning Wash Well of Mixing Bar .....................................................5-22 5.4.4 Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor............................................................5-23 5.4.5 Cleaning Reagent Probe Rotor ..........................................................5-23 5.4.6 Cleaning Mixing Bar Rotor .................................................................5-24 Maintenance Every Six Months.........................................................................5-25 Irregular Maintenance........................................................................................5-25 5.6.1 Unclogging Sample Probe..................................................................5-25 5.6.2 Unclogging Reagent Probe ................................................................5-32 5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe....................................................................5-38 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe ..................................................................5-38 5.6.5 Replacing Mixing Bar .........................................................................5-39 5.6.6 Replacing Plunger Assembly of Sample/Reagent Syringe ................ 5-43 5.6.7 Removing Air Bubbles........................................................................5-45 5.6.8 Replacing Lamp .................................................................................5-46 5.6.9 Replacing Electrode (optional) ...........................................................5-48 5.6.10 Replacing Reagent Module (optional)................................................5-49 5.6.11 ISE Unit Storage (optional).................................................................5-50 5.6.12 ISE Unit Re-activation (optional)........................................................5-51 Maintenance Log ...............................................................................................5-51
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................6-1 6.1 6.2
Classification of Error Messages.........................................................................6-1 Corrective Measures ...........................................................................................6-4 6.2.1 6.2.2
7
Corrective Measures for General Errors ..............................................6-4 Corrective Measures for ISE Unit Errors............................................6-48
Calculation Methods.........................................................................................................7-1 7.1
7.2
7.3 Ap pend ix A A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 A.9 Ap pend ix B
Reaction Types....................................................................................................7-1 7.1.1 Endpoint ...............................................................................................7-1 7.1.2 Fixed-Time............................................................................................7-1 7.1.3 Kinetic...................................................................................................7-3 Calculation Process.............................................................................................7-3 7.2.1 AD Value → Absorbance......................................................................7-4 7.2.2 Absorbance →Response ....................................................................7-5 7.2.3 Response → Calibration Parameter.....................................................7-9 7.2.4 Calibration Parameter → Test Result/QC Result ...............................7-13 7.2.5 QC Result → QC Conclusion .............................................................7-15 Calculation Method of ISE Unit (optional) .........................................................7-17 Specif ic atio ns ............................................................................................ A-1 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................A-1 Power Requirements ...........................................................................................A-2 Environmental Requirements ..............................................................................A-2 Dimension and Weight ........................................................................................A-2 Other Specifications.............................................................................................A-2 Input/Output Devices...........................................................................................A-2 Interface...............................................................................................................A-3 Built-in Sample Bar Code Scanner (optional)......................................................A-3 ISE Module (optional)..........................................................................................A-3 Supplies ..................................................................................................... B-1
iii
Contents Ap pend ix C
Index ........................................................................................................... C-1
iv
1 System Description This chapter includes the following two sections:
Hardware Introduction
Software Introduction
The BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer is a chemistry system that is designed for the in vitro quantitative determination of clinical chemistries in serum, plasma, urine, CSF and other samples.
NOTE: Not all the parameters the reagents claim capable of testing can be tested on the analyzer. Consult the reagent suppliers for detailed information.
1.1
Hardw are Introd uct ion The BS-300 consists of the analyzing unit, operation unit, output unit, replacing parts and consumables. The analyzing unit and the operation unit are as shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 Overview of the analyzing unit and the operation unit
Analyzing Unit
Operation Unit
1-1
System Description
1.1.1 Analyzing Unit The analyzing unit handles all the analyzing operations, which include dispensing samples and reagents, mixing, reaction and measurement, automatically replacing reaction cuvettes, etc. The analyzing unit consists of the following major parts:
Sample disk assembly
Built-in sample bar code scanner (optional)
Sample dispenser
Reagent disk assembly
Reagent dispenser
Mixer
Reaction cuvette loader
Reaction disk assembly
Photometric system
ISE module (optional)
Figure 1-2 Top view
1-2
System Description Figure 1-3 Front view
Connect the power cord to the power plug shown in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-4 Rear view
DEIONIZED WATER: If you choose to feed deionized water from the back of the analyzing unit, pull the deionized water tubing into the unit from here;
D-SENSOR: If you choose to feed deionized water from the back of the analyzing unit, pull the cable of the deionized water level detector into the unit from here;
1-3
System Description
WASTE: If choose to discharge waste from the back of the analyzing unit, pull the waste tubing out of the unit from here;
W-SENSOR: If you choose to discharge the waste from the back of the analyzing unit, pull the cable of the waste level detector out of the unit from here;
COM: It is the serial port for communication with the operation unit;
RESET: You can press this button to restart the analyzing unit when it stops responding.
WARNING: Press the RESET button only when the analyzing unit stops responding. Do not press this button when the unit is working normally. Otherwise, it may lead to system failure, unreliable analysis results or serious unexpected consequences.
1.1.1.1 Sample Disk The sample disk (as Figure 1-5 shows) holds sample tubes and rotates (counter-clockwise only) the designated tube to the position for the sample probe to aspirate.
Figure 1-5 Sample disk
The sample disk is composed of two circles – an inner circle and an outer circle. It provides 60 tube positions, 30 on the inner circle and 30 on the outer circle. Every tube position has an identification number. Positions 1-45 are for samples, E1-E5 for emergency samples, S1-S6 for calibrators, C1-C3 for controls, and W for distilled water. All the other positions except the position W can be used for samples, too. The sample disk can hold six types of tubes – micro sample cup, collection tube, Φ12mm×68.5mm, Φ12mm ×99mm, Φ12.7mm×75mm and Φ12.7mm×100mm. To install the sample disk, keep the handle at the vertical position, align the central hole of the handwheel to the rotor, gently lower the sample disk all the way down (rotate the disk a bit as necessary) and move the handle back to the horizontal position to secure the disk to the rotor. When you have finished installing the disk,
1-4
System Description grab the handwheel and lightly pull it upward. If the disk remains secured, it means it is well installed. To remove the sample disk, first shift the handle from the horizontal position to the vertical position. Then grab the handle or handwheel and pull the disk upward to remove it from the rotor. To load sample tubes, insert the tube into the tube holder until the bottom of the tube contacts the groove on the tube rack. To remove sample tubes, grab the tube and pull it upward to remove it from the tube holder.
WARNING: Before installing/removing the sample disk, make sure the analyzing unit is turned off and the sample disk has stopped. Before installing/removing the sample tubes, make sure the analyzing unit is turned off and the sample disk has stopped. Do not use sample tubes other than the specified. Before running the analyzing unit, make sure that the sample disk cover is closed and the round red mark on the cover is aligned with its counterpart on the panel. Otherwise the sample probe may be damaged. If samples spill in the sample compartment or on the sample disk, be sure to wipe the spills with cloth soaked with water or disinfector after turning off the analyzing unit.
1.1.1.2 Bui lt-in Sample Bar C ode Sca nner (opti onal)
Figure 1-6 Built-in bar code scanner (optional)
Bar Code Scanner Window
The built-in sample bar code scanner (optional) can read the bar code labels on the sample tubes. The bar code labels can be applied to the following sample tubes.
Φ12mm ×99mm
Φ12.7mm×75mm
Φ12.7mm×100mm
1-5
System Description The bar code labels applied to the sample tubes must meet the following requirements.
The bottom of the sample tube fully contacts the tube rack of the sample disk.
There is no obstruction between the scanner and the bar code labels.
Stick the bar code label to the sample tube so that the lower end of the bar code label is 8-10mm above the bottom of the tube.
The length of the bar code label is no more than 55mm with blank areas of 5 mm are provided at both sides of barcode. Tube
Bar code label
5mm n o m o re th a n 5 5 m m
5mm 8-10mm
Black print on white background.
Stick the bar code label to the sample tube so that the inclination angle is no more than 5°. Inclination angle
Stick the entire surface of the label to the surface of the sample tube so it will not peel.
When inserting the tube with bar code label into the sample disk, ensure the center of the label is within the ±2mm range, as shown in the figures below.
1-6
System Description
+2mm
Center of bar code label -2mm
Bar code label
NOTE: Mindray recommends printing coding information beside barcode.
Bar code symbol specifications: The bar code scanner can read the following bar code symbologies: Code 128 (Set A, B,
C), Code 39, Codabar, ITF (Interleaved 2 of 5), UPC/EAN, Code93
Feature size: 0.19-0.50mm
Length: 3-16
Thin bar: thick bar: 1:2.5-3
Height: 10mm or more
Printing: black print on white background; the minimum acceptable symbol grade is Class C as defined in the ANSI MH10.8M Print Quality Specification.
NOTE: To ensure the stability of reading Codabar, the length of it is no less than 4. The maximum number of digits will be determined after confirming that the actual printed labels can be read properly.
1.1.1.3 Sample Disp enser The sample dispenser is composed of a sample probe, probe arm, probe rotor (Figure 1-7), syringe (Figure 1-8) and a fluid system. It aspirates certain amount of
1-7
System Description sample from the designated sample tube and dispenses the aspirated sample to the designated reaction cuvette. Open the middle door of the analyzing unit and you will see the sample syringe (right) and the reagent syringe (left). The sample syringe can aspirate/dispense 3-45µl of sample for clinical chemistry tests or 70µl of sample for ISE tests (if the ISE unit is connected) and its minimum scale is 0.5µl.
Figure 1-7 Sample dispenser
Figure 1-8 Sample syringe
Sample Syringe
To dispense the sample, the sample probe first moves to the sample tube to aspirate certain amount of the sample, then to the reaction disk to dispense the aspirated sample to a reaction cuvette and finally to the wash well for cleaning. The sample probe can automatically detect the sample level. When the sample probe contacts obstacles in the vertical direction, its safeguard will automatically protect the probe from damage.
1-8
System Description
WARNING: When the analyzing unit is running, do not place any part of your body or any obstacle in the route the arm moves. Otherwise, it may lead to personnel injury or equipment damage.
1.1.1.4 Reagent Dis k Ass embl y The reagent disk assembly is composed of a reagent disk and a refrigerator. The reagent disk (as Figure 1-9 shows) holds the reagent bottles and rotates (counter-clockwise only) the designated bottle to the position for the reagent probe to aspirate. The refrigerator keeps the reagents in a low temperature environment to keep them stable and minimize volatilization.
Figure 1-9 Reagent disk
The reagent disk has two circles, inner circle and outer circle. There are 25 reagent positions in each circle and the reagent disk has totally 50 reagent positions. The reagent disk can hold the Mindray inner-circle bottles, Mindray outer-circle bottles, Hitachi 7060 bottles, Hitachi 7170 bottles and Hitachi 20ml bottles. The refrigerator can run 24 hours a day to keep the temperature at 4-10 ℃.
NOTE: The refrigerator has a power supply independent of that of the analyzing unit. It will be put into service once the POWER is turned on.
To install the reagent disk, keep the handle at the vertical position, align the central hole of the handwheel to the rotor, gently lower the reagent disk all the way down (rotate the disk a bit as necessary) and move the handle back to the horizontal position to secure the disk to the rotor. When you have finished installing the disk, grab
1-9
System Description the handwheel and lightly pull it upward. If the disk remains secured, it means it is well installed. To remove the reagent disk, first shift the handle from the horizontal position to the vertical position. Then grab the handle or handwheel and pull the disk upward to remove it from the rotor. To load reagent bottles, insert the bottle into the bottle holder until the bottom of the bottle contacts the groove on the bottle rack. To remove the reagent bottle, grab the bottle and pull it upward to remove it from the bottle holder.
WARNING: Before installing/removing the reagent disk, make sure the analyzing unit is turned off and the sample disk has stopped. Before installing/removing the reagent bottles, make sure the analyzing unit is turned off and the sample disk has stopped. When installing the bottle, make sure the bottle bottom is in full contact with the bottle rack. Before running the analyzing unit, make sure that the reagent disk cover is closed and the round red mark on the cover is aligned with its counterpart on the panel. Otherwise the sample probe may be damaged and cooling capacity of the refrigerator will be degraded. If reagents spill in the reagent compartment or on the reagent disk, be sure to wipe the spills with cloth soaked with water or disinfector after turning off the analyzing unit.
1.1.1.5 Reagent Dis penser The reagent dispenser is composed of a reagent probe, probe arm, probe rotor (Figure 1-10), syringe (Figure 1-11) and fluid system. It aspirates certain amount of reagent from the designated reagent bottle and dispenses the aspirated reagent to the designated reaction cuvette. The reagent probe arm can preheat the aspirated reagent. Open the middle door of the analyzing unit and you will see the reagent syringe (right) and reagent syringe (left). The reagent syringe can aspirate/dispense 30-450µl of reagent and its minimum scale is 1µl.
1-10
System Description Figure 1-10 Reagent dispenser
Figure 1-11 Reagent syringe
To dispense the reagent, the reagent probe first moves to the reagent bottle to aspirate certain amount of the reagent, then to the reaction disk to dispense the aspirated reagent to a reaction cuvette and finally to the wash well for cleaning. The reagent probe can automatically detect the reagent level. When the reagent probe contacts obstacles in the vertical direction its safeguard will automatically function to protect the probe from damage.
WARNING: When the analyzing unit is running, do not place any part of your body or any obstacle in the route the arm moves. Otherwise, it may lead to personnel injury or equipment damage.
1-11
System Description
1.1.1.6 Mixer The mixer is composed of a mixing bar, bar arm and rotor, as Figure 1-12 shows. The mixing bar thoroughly stirs the reaction mixture (reagents and sample) in the reaction cuvette.
Figure 1-12 Mixer
For the single-reagent test, the mixer starts to work after the sample is dispensed into the reaction cuvette. For the double-reagent test, the mixer starts to work after the sample or the second reagent is dispensed into the reaction cuvette. The mixing bar moves to a position above the reaction disk, lowers into the cuvette, and rotates to mix the mixture in the cuvette. After that, the bar moves to the wash well for cleaning and de-watering.
1.1.1.7 React io n Cuvett e Loader The cuvette loader is composed of a cuvette feeder, manipulator and used-cuvette bucket. This loader loads new cuvettes to the reaction disk and dumps used cuvettes into a bucket. The feeder is located in the cuvette compartment and transfers cuvettes to the manipulator, which grabs the cuvettes and loads them to the reaction disk and then unloads the used cuvettes and dumps them into the used-cuvette bucket. Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the used-cuvette bucket in the middle.
NOTE: Normally, the used-cuvette bucket can hold 80 segments of reaction cuvettes (10 excessive cuvettes per segment). Beoverflow sure to and empty the bucketthe in time so that cuvettes will not contaminate cabinet.
Disposable cuvettes are adopted as the reaction cuvettes. Ten cuvettes are bound together as one cuvette segment. The cuvette compartment can house 30 cuvette segments, which are sufficient for 300 continuous tests.
1-12
System Description When all the cuvettes of a cuvette segment have been used, the reaction disk rotates the segment to the unloading position, and then the manipulator dumps the used segment into the used-cuvette bucket and loads the new segment. When a segment is taken from the cuvette compartment, the cuvette feeder pushes the next segment to the loading position. When there are less than 10 segments in the compartment, the analyzing unit, though keeping working, will give an alarm. Seeing the alarm, you should, if you still have more tests to do, add more segments to the compartment. When all the segments in the compartment are used, the analyzing unit will stop first loading cuvette segments, and then stop dispensing samples when all the segments on the reaction disk are used. But it will keep working until all the scheduled tests are done. Present the cuvette segment to the entry of the cuvette feeder as Figure 1-13 shows and gently push it toward inside. Load all the segments one by one until they are all loaded. When you are done, click the Load Cuvette button (refer to 4.1.4.2 Reaction Disk tab for details) to command the cuvette feeder to press the newly added segments forward. Be sure not to load the segments as Figure 1-14 shows.
NOTE: When loading cuvette segments to the entry of the cuvette compartment, be sure to keep them upright. Remove the inclined segments immediately upon seeing them and reload them the right way. Be sure to load the segments to the cuvette compartment in the right direction (Figure 1-13). Reversely loaded segments (Figure 1-14) may jam the loader and halts the analyzing unit. Do not click the Load Cuvette button before completing adding all the cuvette segments to the compartment. Otherwise, the loading operation may fail.
Figure 1-13 Loading cuvette segments the right way
1-13
System Description Figure 1-14 Loading cuvette segments the wrong way
Open the middle door to load/remove the used-cuvette bucket.
BIOHAZARD: Be sure to load the used-cuvette bucket to the designated position on the bottom plate. Otherwise, the used-cuvette may not be dumped into the bucket and the spilled reaction mixture may contaminate and corrode the cabinet. Be sure to wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when loading or removing the used-cuvette bucket. Be sure to dispose of the used-cuvette in compliance with the local regulations.
1.1.1.8 Reaction Disk Assembly The reaction disk assembly is composed of a reaction disk and temperature-controlled chamber, both of which are inside the analyzing unit.
a
The reaction disk holds the reaction cuvettes, in which the sample reacts with the reagents and colorimetric readings are taken. The temperature-controlled chamber provides for the reaction an environment of consistent temperature. The reaction disk can hold 8 cuvette segments (80 cuvettes). The cuvettes adopted are
Disposable;
5mm×6mm×25mm (5mm optical path);
750µl (capable of holding 180-500µl of the reaction mixture).
The temperature chamber keeps the temperature at 37±0.3 ℃ fluctuation.
1-14
with ±0.1 ℃
System Description
BIOHAZARD: Be sure to dispose of the used cuvettes in compliance with the local regulations.
CAUTION: The reaction cuvettes should not be re-used. Otherwise, the system performance may be degraded.
During the analyzing process, the reaction disk rotates (counter-clock wise only) or to cuvette-loading position, sample-dispensing position, reagent-dispensing position, mixing position as needed. The colorimetric readings are taken when the specified cuvette passes through the optical axis.
1.1.1.9 Photometr ic System The photometric system measures the absorbance of the reacting liquid in the reaction cuvettes. It consists of a measurement optical system and a reference optical system, the former providing 9 monochromatic lights and the latter compensating the former.
Specifications
9 optical paths with fixed interference filters. Wavelengths: 340nm, 405nm, 450nm, 510nm, 546nm, 578nm, 630nm, 670nm, 700nm Half band-width: ≤12nm Wavelength accuracy: ±2nm Measurement range: 0.1-4.0 Abs Lamp: 12V 50VA tungsten-halogen
Movement
The measurement optical system consists of 9 optical paths. The absorbance is taken when the reaction cuvette rotates to the correspond path. The analyzer can measure the absorbance of 9 cuvettes simultaneously.
1.1.1.10 ISE Unit (opt io nal) The ISE unit (optional) consists of ISE module, pump module and reagent module, as shown in the figure below.
1-15
System Description Figure 1-15 ISE unit (optional) Pump module
ISE module
Reagent module to be placed here
-
The ISE unit (optional) measures the concentration of Li+, Na+, K+ and Cl in serum, plasma and diluted urine. The volume of the serum or plasma sample is 70 µl and that of the diluted urine sample is 140µl. The dilution ratio of the urine sample is 1:10 (1 part of urine sample and 9 parts of urine diluent). -
There are five electrodes including Li+, Na+, K+, Cl and reference electrodes in the + ISE module. If the Li electrode is not selected, a spacer electrode is substituted for it. Reagent module is integrated with Calibrant A, Calibrant B, waste containers and a chip which indicates the volume of the reagents.
1.1.2 Operation Uni t The operation unit is a computer with the Operating Software of the analyzer installed. It manages test applications, registration, generation of the work list, monitoring of reactions, calculation and data management (entering, storing and searching).
1.1.3 Output Unit The output unit is a printer that prints out the test results.
1-16
System Description
1.2
Software Introd uct ion
1.2.1 Softw are Interface The interface of the Operating Software of BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer (hereinafter referred to as the operating software) is shown in Figure 1-16.
Figure 1-16 Interface of the operating software
Header area
Displays the names of the operating software and the manufacturer.
Title bar
Displays the title of the current display area.
Menu area
Displays: [Routine ], [Parameters ], [Data], [System ], [Help ]. You can move the mouse to any of the listed menu and click the left button of the mouse (hereinafter referred to as click) to display its pull-down menu.
Pull-down menu
You can click the listed item of the pull-down menu to perform certain operation.
Small buttons
Click the small button to view the user guide. You can also click Help → Guide to view the user guide. Refer to 4.5.2 Guid e for details. Click the small button to exit the operating software. You can also click Routine → Exit to exit the software. Refer to 4.1.8 Exi t for details.
1-17
System Description
Shortcut buttons area
Totally 13 buttons are available, which are:
,
, , , , , , , click any of the buttons to perform certain operation quickly.
,
, ,
,
. You can
Display area
Displays settings, results, graphics and so on.
System status area Displays the system status and reaction temperature.
Warning messages area
Displays the warning messages, including malfunction alarm messages and prompt messages for mis-operation. When seeing the warning messages, refer to 6 Troubleshooting for solutions.
Period area
Displays how many periods (every period lasts 12 seconds) of test have passed since the beginning of the first test after the latest power-on.
Time area
Displays current date and time.
Operator area
Displays the current operator who operates the system.
1.2.2 Main Interface Components
Dialog box
The dialog box is one of the most common interfaces. See the following example:
Tab
See the figure below for examples of the tab. Click the tab and you can access the screen that it indexes.
1-18
System Description
Combo box
Click “▼” and a pull-down list will display, as the figure below shows. Click the desired item to select it.
Combo box
Option button
Click the option button to select the option it represents. Note that for a given group of option buttons, you can only select one of them.
Option button
Check box
Click the check box to select the option it represents and click it again to de-select it. Note that for a given group of check boxes, you can choose more than one of them at one time.
1-19
System Description
Check box
Edit box
You can enter characters from the keyboard in the edit box.
Edit box
Button
Click a button and you can access the function it indexes.
Scroll bar When the contents to be displayed are too many for one screen, you can use the scroll bar to see the hidden contents. Move the cursor to the scroll bar, press left button of the mouse and hold it, then you can drag the scroll bar upward or downward to see the hidden contents. Or you can press the key such as Page Up, Page Down,↑or↓on the keyboard to see the hidden contents.
Scroll bar
1-20
System Description
1.2.3 Mouse Operations
Clicking
In this manual, “clicking” refers to moving the pointer of the mouse to the desired item and click the left button of the mouse.
Double-clicking
In this manual, “double-clicking” refers to moving the pointer of the mouse to the desired item and click the left button of the mouse twice swiftly.
Working with the keyboard
When you wan to select multiple targets, you need to use the mouse together with the keyboard. To select discontinuous targets: Press and hold CTRL and click them one by one. Release CTRL when you have selected all the targets. To select continuous targets: Click the first (or last) of the desired targets, and then press and hold SHIFT and click the last (or the first) of the desired targets. Release SHIFT when you have selected all the targets.
1-21
2 Installation WARNING: The BS-300 should only be installed by Mindray-authorized personnel only.
To facilitate the installation, you should prepare a place meeting the requirements specified in 2.2 Installation Requirements . If you need to move the analyzer to another site, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor, who are the appropriate people for the moving job.
2.1 Unpacking When you receive your analyzer, carefully inspect the package. If you see any signs of mishandling or damage, file a claim immediately with Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. After opening the package, check the delivered goods against the packing list as well as the appearance of the analyzer. If you find anything missing or damaged, alert Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor immediately.
2.2
Installation Requi rements CAUTION: Make sure the analyzer is installed in a place meeting the following requirements. Otherwise, it will not perform as promised.
2.2.1 Installation Environ ment Requirements
The BS-300 is for indoor use only.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (gradient less than 1/200).
The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to bear 500Kg weight.
The installation site should be well ventilated.
2-1
Installation
CAUTION: The analyzer radiates heat from its rear side when operating. A well-ventilated environment helps keep the room temperature stable. Use ventilation equipment if necessary. But if so, be sure not to expose the analyzer to the direct draft that may lead to unreliable results.
The site should be free of dusts as much as possible.
The site should not be in direct sun.
The site should not be near a heat or draft source. The site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be free of vibration.
The site should not be disturbed by large noise or power supply.
The analyzer should not be placed near brush-type motors and electrical contacts that are frequently turned on and off.
Do not use such devices as mobile phones or radio transmitters that generate electromagnetic waves near the analyzer.
The above-sea-level height of the site should be lower than 2000 meters.
2.2.2 Power Requir ements
Power supply: 100-130V/200-240V~, 50/60Hz, three-wire power cord and properly grounded.
The analyzer should be connected to a properly-grounded power socket, whose maximum power consumption should be 1kVA and neutral-to-ground voltage ≤ 6V. If possible, connect the analyzer to a power line specially designed for medical instrumentation.
The distance between the power socket and the analyzer should be less than 5 meters.
WARNING: Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Improper grounding may lead to electric shock and/or equipment damage. Be sure to connect the analyzer to a power socket that meets the above-mentioned requirements and has a proper fuse installed.
2.2.3 Temperature and Humidity Requirements
Ambient temperature: 15℃-30℃, with fluctuation less than ±2 ℃/H.
Relative humidity: 35%RH-80%RH, no condensation.
2-2
Installation
CAUTION: When used in conditions other than the specified, the analyzer may not provide reliable test results. If the temperature or relative humidity does not meet the above-mentioned requirements, be sure to use air-conditioning equipment.
2.2.4 Water Suppl y and Drain Requir ements
The water must meet requirements of the CAP Type II water.
The water temperature should be within 5℃-32℃.
BIOHAZARD: Be sure to dispose of the waste according to the local regulations.
CAUTION: The water to be used on the analyzer must meet the requirements of the CAP Type II water. Insufficiently purified water may result in misleading measurement.
2.2.5 Space and Accessibility Requirements See the figure below for the space and accessibility requirements.
Figure 2-1 Space and accessibility requirements WALL 0 0 5 m u m i n i M
Maximum2500
0 1 7
Operation Unit
Analyzing Unit
980 F R O N T
0 0 5 m u m i in M
Minimum500
Minimum500
2-3
Unit: mm
Installation
2.3
Connecti ng the Tanks BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the below checks.
2.3.1 Conn ecti ng th e Deioni zed Water Tank 1 2
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF. Open the lower door of the analyzing unit.
3
Pull out the extractable plate.
4
Put the pickup tubes and the sensor into the deionized water tank, then close the cap of the deionized water tank clockwise.
5
Put the deionized water tank on the right of the extractable plate.
6
Push the extractable plate back in.
7
Plug the green connector to its counterpart on the analyzing unit and turn the connector clockwise until secure. Deionized Water Connector (Green)
Deionized Water Connector (Red) BNC Connector
Pickup Tube
8
Plug the red connector to its counterpart on the analyzing unit and turn the connector clockwise until secure.
9
Plug the BNC connector to its counterpart on the analyzing unit and turn the connector clockwise until secure.
10
Close the lower door.
2.3.2 Conn ecti ng th e Waste Tank 1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Open the lower door of the analyzing unit.
3
Pull out the extractable plate.
4
Put the waste tube and the sensor into the waste tank, then close the cap of the waste tank clockwise.
5
Put the waste tank on the left of the extractable plate.
2-4
Installation 6
Push the extractable plate back in.
7
Keep pressing the pin on the connector and grab the waste tap and insert it to the connector. BNC Connector
Waste Connector
Pin Waste Tap Waste Tube
2.4
8
Plug the BNC connector to its counterpart on the analyzing unit and turn the connector clockwise until secure.
9
Close the lower door.
ISE Unit (optio nal) Installation BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the below checks.
CAUTION: Use the consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables may degrade the system performance.
2-5
Installation
2.4.1 Installing Electrodes NOTE: The electrode storage for Li and K is different from the other electrodes. For there is some certain kind of solution in the lumen of the electrode, a tape covering both ends of the lumen can be seen. So whenever unpacking these electrodes, remove the tape first. If some of the solution leaks outside of the electrode, it should be wiped before installation. Each electrode including the reference electrode has an O-ring on one side of its lumen, so ensure the side with the O-ring towards up when installing the electrodes. If the O-ring is missing, replace with a new one. Extra two O-rings are supplied in the electrode boxes. Connection Pins
O-ring
1
Place the POWER to OFF.
2
Open the ISE unit (optional) door.
3
Unscrew the screw of the ISE module cover by hand.
2-6
Installation 4
The reference electrode is the first to be installed. Open the electrode from its protective packaging and remove the insert from the lumen of the reference electrode. Make sure that the red sphere in the reference electrode floats on the top of the internal fill solution in the reservoir.
Red sphere
Insert
Place the reference electrode inside the housing by pressing down the compression plate and push it straight against the back of the housing. Release the compression plate and ensure the electrode cannot be easily moved. Sample entry port
Li+ electrode (or Spacer electrode) Na+ electrode K+ electrode Cl- electrode Reference electrode Compression plate
Housing
5
Remove the Chloride electrode from its protective packaging and place it in the ISE module housing in the same way as the reference electrode.
6
Repeat the process for the Potassium electrode.
7
Repeat the process for the Sodium electrode.
8
Repeat the process for the Lithium electrode. If you do not select Lithium electrode, repeat the process for the spacer electrode.
9
Push all the electrodes simultaneously to ensure they are in correct alignment. All the electrodes for Li (spacer electrode included), Na, K and Cl are the same size and shape. Connection pins at the rear of each electrode are different which ensures that the electrodes are inserted in the correct order. So if one of the electrodes can not be easily push into the housing, check the electrode first then repeat the installation process.
10
Screw the screw of the ISE module cover.
11
Close the ISE unit door.
2-7
Installation
2.4.2 Installi ng Reagent Mod ule 1
Place the POWER to OFF.
2
Open the ISE unit (optional) door.
3
Take off the three red caps from the reagent module. Put the wand on the module, press it down to connect to the module firmly. Then put the module with the wand into the ISE unit.
4
Place the POWER to ON.
5
Restart the operating software, or if it is running, enter the System Maintenance screen and click the Download Settings button at the Motion Others tab.
6
Enter the ISE screen and click the Replace button.
7
Enter the ISE screen of the operating software.
2-8
Installation 8
Enter “20” into the edit box to the right of Time(s) and click the Purge AB button.
9
Close the ISE unit door.
2-9
3 Basic Operations This chapter provides step-by-step procedures for operating the analyzer for basic tasks.
3.1
Daily Proc edur e
3-1
Basic Operations
3.2
Preparing for Analy sis
3.2.1 Checking before Startup Do the followings checks before starting the analyzer.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when performing the below checks.
Check the power supply and make sure it can supply proper voltage for the analyzer.
Check the connections among the analyzing unit, operation unit and printer. Make sure the connections are right and secure. Check the power cords of the analyzing unit, operation unit and printer and make sure they are well connected to power sockets.
Check and make sure sufficient printing paper is prepared for the printer.
Check the sample and reagent syringes for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking Sample/R eagent Syringes .
Check the sample and reagent probes and make sure there is no fluid hanging on the probe tips. If there is, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Check the connections of the deionized water and wastewater as instructed by 5.2.6 Checking Connection Connection of Wastewater . of Deionized Water
and 5.2.7
Checking
Check the sample probe and make sure it is neither dirty nor bent. If it is dirty, wash it as instructed by 5.3.1 Washing Sample Probe ; if it is bent, replace it as instructed by 5.6. 3 Replacing Sample Pro be.
Check the reagent probe and make sure it is neither dirty nor bent. If it is dirty, wash it as instructed by 5.3.2 Washing Reagent Probe ; if it is bent, replace it as instructed by 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe .
Check the mixing bar and make sure it is neither dirty nor bent. If it is dirty, wash it as instructed by 5.3.3 Washing Mixing Bar ; if it is bent, replace it as instructed by 5.6.5 Replacing Mixing Bar .
Check the cuvette compartment and make sure there are sufficient cuvettes in it. If the cuvettes are not sufficient, add more cuvettes as instructed by 1.1.1.7 Reacti on Cuvette Lo ader .
CAUTION: You must prepare enough cuvettes for the upcoming analysis. If you find the cuvettes are not enough, add more immediately. Sometimes the new cuvettes are not as smooth as they should be. Check the surface of the cuvettes for bumps and take necessary measures to remove the found bumps before loading them to the compartment. Otherwise, they may jam the analyzing unit.
3-2
Basic Operations
Check and make sure there is enough deionized water in the deionized water tank as instructed by 5.2.8 Checking Remainin g Deioni zed Water .
CAUTION: You must prepare enough deionized water. If you find the deionized water is not enough, add more deionized water to the tank.
Check the waste tank and make sure it is empty. If not, empty the tank as
instructed by 5.2.9 Emptying Waste Tank . Check the used-cuvettes bucket and make sure it is empty. If not, empty the bucket as instructed by 5.2.10 Emptyi ng Used-Cuvettes Buc ket .
3.2.2 Power-on Power up the analyzer in the sequence presented below:
Place the POWER to ON.
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON.
Press the power button of the monitor of the operation unit.
Press the power button of the computer of the operation unit.
Press the power button of the printer.
3.2.3 Starting the Operating Software NOTE: Ensure the hibernation function of the display is unavailable: After entering the display properties screen, select Never for Turn off monitor , Turn off hard disks and System standby on the Power Schemes tab and do not select Enable hibernation on the Hibernate tab.
After you have logged on the WINDOWS operating system, you may
Double-click the
Click [START] → [PROGRAM] or [ALL PROGRAMGS] [BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer Operating Software] [BS-300 Chemistry Analyzer Operating Software] to start the operating software.
icon on the desktop to start the operating software; or →
→
The operating software will do the initialization procedure in the sequence presented below:
Initializing system environment.
Initializing database.
Initializing printer.
Downloading system settings from the analyzing unit.
3-3
Basic Operations
Shaking hands with the analyzing unit.
The system does the startup and warm-up procedures in the sequence presented below and the analyzer will then enter the standby state:
Initializing database, system environment and printer; connecting to the LIS (Laboratory Information System. If the LIS server is configured.); downloading settings; shaking hands with the modules; communicating with the ISE unit (if configured) and the built-in bar code scanner (if configured); running self-tests and resetting the modules. A dialog box will then pop up to ask you to enter your username and password.
NOTE: You need to enter proper username and password to access the control system. Use the initial username and password (username: administrator; password: bs300) if this is the first time the control system being used and then you may edit your own username and password as instructed by 4.4.4 User .
Measuring dark currents;
Turning on the lamp of the photometer and loading the first cuvette segment to measure the backgrounds, which reflects the status of the lamp;
Loading new cuvettes, taking their absorbance and marking the dirty ones;
Checking the status of the deionized water tank and waste tank and checking the
status of the cuvette compartment; Performing the default washing procedure to wash the exteriors and interiors of the sample probe, reagent probe and mixing bar with deionized water;
Checking the status of the reaction disk repeatedly and displaying its temperature on the main interface. When the warm-up process is still under way, the status box in the upper right corner displays Incubation and when the expected temperature is reached it displays Idle , indicating the analyzing unit is on standby.
CAUTION: You may start the analysis once the initialization is finished. However, Mindray recommends you wait until the temperature and photometric system is fully stabilized, which is when the status box displays Idle and the analyzer has been turned on for 30 minutes.
3.2.4 Setting Up the BS-300 The analyzer will not function properly unless it is properly set up. You must complete all the following settings if this is the first time the analyzer being used. Before requesting the tests, you must finish the following settings:
To set the options regarding the basic parameters of the system, refer to 4.4.2 Setup .
3-4
Basic Operations
To set the options regarding the hospital information, refer to 4.4.3 Hospital .
To set the options regarding test parameters and reference, refer to 4.2.1.1 Parameters tab and 4.2.1.2 Referenc e Range tab.
To set the options regarding calibrators and calibration, refer to 4.2.3.1 Calibrator tab and 4.2.3.2 Rule tab.
To set the options regarding controls, QC rule and QC test, refer to 4.2.4.1 Control tab, 4.2.4.2 Rule tab and 4.2.4.3 Setup tab.
To set the options regarding the reagent parameters, refer to 4.2.2.1 Reagent Disk tab.
To set the options regarding the carryover information among tests, refer to 4.2.1.5 Carryo ver tab.
To set the options regarding the printing parameters, refer to 4.4.7 Prin t.
3.2.5 Preparing f or An alysis
3.2.5.1 Preparing R eagents Load reagent bottles to their assigned positions on the reagent disk. Open the bottles.
3.2.5.2 Preparing D is ti ll ed Water Load enough distilled water to position W on the sample disk. Load enough distilled water to position 49 on the reagent disk. Load enough urine diluent to position 50 on the reagent disk if ISE tests to be run. Note that the urine diluent recommended by Mindray is used.
3.2.5.3 Checki ng Remainin g Reagents Check remaining reagents if necessary. Refer to 4.2.2.2 Inventory tab for details.
3.3
Starting Analy sis
3.3.1 Calibration You must calibrate if this is the first time the analyzer being used.
CAUTION: You need to run the calibration again when you change reagent lots, test parameters, lamp or other conditions.
3-5
Basic Operations To request calibrations, refer to 4.1.2 Calibration . After requesting calibrations, you should load corresponding calibrators to their assigned positions on the sample disk. To run calibrations, refer to 4.1.5 Start. A calibration run experiences 4 states: Requested , Waiting , Running , Finished . You can check the results of the finished runs in the following ways.
To view the results at the Status →Calib. Test , refer to 4.1.4.4 Calib. Test tab .
To view the results at the Status tab.
To view the results at the Calibration
→
Sample Disk , refer to 4.1.4.1 Sample Disk →
Result , refer to 4.2.3.3 Result tab .
If the ISE unit is connected, refer to 4.4.11.1 Calibration for detailed information about running ISE calibration and check its results.
3.3.2 QC To request QCs, refer to 4.1.3 QC. After requesting QCs, you should load corresponding controls to their assigned positions on the sample disk.
NOTE: If the ISE unit (optional) is connected, ISE QC should be performed. Please use Mindray-recommended controls for ISE QC.
To run QCs, refer to 4.1.5 Start. A QC run experiences 4 states: Requested , Waiting , Running , Finished . You can check the results of the finished runs in the following ways.
To view the results at the Status →QC Test, refer to 4.1.4.5 QC Test tab.
To view the results at the Status tab.
To view the results at the QC Real-time Result /Daily Result /Day-to-day Result , refer to 4.2.4.4 Real-time Result tab, 4.2.4.5 Daily Result tab or 4.2.4.6 Day-to-day Resul t tab.
→
Sample Disk , refer to 4.1.4.1 Sample Disk
→
3.3.3 Samples To request samples, refer to 4.1.1 Samples . You can request a STAT sample run in the way similar to an ordinary run, except that you have to tick the check box to the right of STAT, as Figure3-1 shows. The requested STAT run will be inserted into the current work list as Waiting and has higher priority than other tests.
3-6
Basic Operations Figure3-1 Requesting a STAT Sample Run
After requesting, load the samples to their corresponding positions on the sample disk. To run samples, refer to 4.1.5 Start. A sample run experiences 4 states: Requested , Waiting , Running , Finished . You can check the results of the finished runs in the following ways.
To view the results at the Status →Sample Test , refer to 4.1.4.3 Sample Test tab.
To view the results at the Status tab.
To view the results at the Data
→
Sample Disk , refer to 4.1.4.1 Sample Disk
Result
→
→
Results , refer to 4.3.4.1 Resul ts t ab.
3.3.4 Editing Results of Sample Runs Skip this section if you do not need to edit the sample run results.
CAUTION: Sample run results can only be edited by authorized personnel.
To edit one or more sample run results, refer to 4.1.4.3 Sample Test tab or 4.3.4.1 Results tab for details. To revise one or more sample run results, refer to 4.1.4.3 Sample Test tab or 4.3.4.1 Results tab for details.
3.3.5 Prin tin g Results of Sample Runs To print sample results, refer to 4.1.4.3 Sample Test tab or 4.3.4.1 Results tab for details.
3.4
Finishing Analysis
3.4.1 Exiting the Operating Software To exit the operating software, refer to 4.1.8 Exi t for details.
3-7
Basic Operations
3.4.2 Shutdown After exiting the Windows operating system, switch off the following powers in the presented order:
Turn off the printer;
Turn off the monitor of the operation unit;
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
NOTE: The refrigerator still functions after the ANALYZING UNIT POWER is placed to OFF. To shut down the refrigerator, place the POWER to OFF.
3.4.3 Checking after Shutdown
Cap every reagent bottle on the reagent disk.
Remove the calibrators, controls, distilled water and samples from the sample disk.
Check the surface of the analyzing unit for stains and wipe them off with clean soft cloth.
Check the waste tank and make sure it is empty. If not, empty the tank as instructed by 5.2.9 Emptying Waste Tank .
Check the used-cuvette bucket and make sure it is empty. If not, empty the bucket as instructed by 5.2.10 Emptyi ng Used-Cuvettes Buc ket .
BIOHAZARD: Exercise with caution. Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing.
3-8
4 Advanced Operations The chapter presents an introduction of the BS-300 operating software by menus. The main interface of the operating software has five major menu groups:
4.1
Routine
Parameters
Data
System
Help
Routine
4.1.1 Samples Click Routine → Sample , or press F1 to enter the Request Sample screen, as Figure4-1 shows. You can also enter the Request Sample screen by clicking the short-cut button
.
4-1
Advanced Operations Figure4-1 Request Sample screen
The Request Sample screen consists of three zones:
Sample zone – displays information regarding the samples;
As say s and Profiles zone – displays information regarding the assays and profiles;
Operating buttons zone – displays such buttons as Browse , Edit , etc.
The As says zone lists all available tests. You cannot request the assays followed by a forbidden mark, such as . The double-reagent assays, whose reagent positions have already been set, are yellow-framed; the double-reagent assays, whose reagent positions have not been set yet, are gray-framed. The selected assay is followed by a tick. Only if an assay, whose dilution parameters have been set, is selected after Dilution is selected, the tick is red. Otherwise, the tick is green. The sample parameters are interpreted as follows. Parameter
What it does
How to set
Sample Disk
Defines which virtual sample disk the sample is located on.
Click “ ▼ ” to the right of Sample Disk and select the desired disk from the pull down list.
Sample No.
Defines the identification number
Use the system-generated
of the sample or samples. You can enter the desired integers (1-9000) into the edit boxes respectively as the start (left) and end (right) IDs.
ID(s) or enter the desired ID(s) manually.
If you are entering only one sample’s ID ensure the two IDs are the same. Index
A system-generated number for fast search.
4-2
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set
Sample ID
Bar code of the sample.
Enter the bar code from the bar code scanner automatically, enter it manually, or leave it blank.
Position
Defines the sample’s position on the selected sample disk. For STAT samples, Mindray recommends they be placed on positions E1-E5.
Use the system-generated number, click “ ▼ ” to the right of Position to select the desired position, or obtain it by the bar code scanner. For multiple samples, the selected position represents that of the first sample and the analyzer will generate positions for the rest of the samples.
Tube
Defines which type of tube holds the sample.
Click “ ▼ ” to the right of Tube and select either Large tube or Small tube from the pull down list.
Type
Defines the sample type.
Click “ ▼ ” to the right of Type and select one of the following four types: Serum , Plasma , Urine and Others .
Replicates
Defines for how many times the analyzer should run this sample. The default value is 1.
Enter the desired integer
STAT
Defines whether the sample is a stat sample. The analyzer will add the stat sample to the current work list.
Tick the check box to the right of STAT.
S. Blank
Applies to the tests that Endpoint method.
Tick the check box to the right of Blank to enable this function and click it again to disable it.
use
Defines whether to replace the reagents with distilled water and take the absorbance of the mixture before formally analyzing the reagents-sample mixture.
(1-10) clickoftheReplicates button to the orright until the desired integer is reached.
This parameter is only available for Dilution
clinical chemistry tests. Defines whether to dilute sample before analyzing it.
the
This parameter is only available for clinical chemistry tests.
4-3
Tick the check box to the right of Dilution to enable this function and click it again to disable it.
Advanced Operations
To sc an bar cod es NOTE: If the built-in bar code scanner (optional) is not connected, the function is unavailable.
1
Click the Scan button and a dialog box pops up.
2
At the Scan Sample ID screen, select sample(s) you want to be scanned. If you select Al l Positions , the scanner will scan all the positions in the sample disk; if you select Selected Positi ons , you need to enter position No. into the edit boxes to the right of Range and the scanner will scan the positions you just entered.
3
Click the Start button and the scanner will begin to work. The scanning results will be displayed at the Result field.
4-4
Advanced Operations 4
If you want to download information of the scanned samples from the LIS server, click the Download button.
NOTE: The Download button is only available if you select Real-time Download at the System Setup Host Communication screen.
5
Click the Close button. If there is a sample whose bar code is the same with the other one or which is placed in a position where bar code should not be scanned, the Repeated Sample ID dialog box will pop up to remind you. In this case, you need to click the Close button and check the bar code or sample position and take corresponding measures.
To download all sample information from LIS server NOTE: If there is no LIS server connected, the function is unavailable.
1
Click the Download All button and a dialog box pops up.
4-5
Advanced Operations 2
Click the Start button and the system will download all the sample information from the LIS server. If you want to cancel the downloading, click the Cancel button.
3
After the downloading is completed or cancelled, click the Close button. The system will save the information that has been downloaded.
If there are samples that have been requested but not able to test, a dialog boxclick which is shown the figure below popbox. up toRefer remind You can the Close as button to exit the will dialog toyou. the following content To view requested but untestable samples for details.
To dow nload singl e sample information f rom LIS se rver NOTE: If there is no LIS server connected, the function is unavailable.
4-6
Advanced Operations 1
Enter the bar code into the edit box to the right of Sample ID for the current sample, or click the Browse button and find the sample whose sample information you want to get from the LIS server.
2
Click the Download Single button to get corresponding to the bar code from the LIS server.
sample
information
NOTE: The system will download information only for the sample that meets any of the following conditions: (1) It has not been requested before; (2) All the tests requested for it before are at Requested status and Overwrite has been selected at the Host Communication screen (refer to 4.4.2.4 Host Communication tab ).
To r equest sampl es 1
Set the parameters as instructed above.
2
Click the desired test to select it; click it again to de-select it. The selected test will be followed by a green tick. You may select multiple tests for a sample run.
You may also request a pre-defined profile or profiles and the selected profile or profiles will also be followed by a green tick.
3
Click the Request button to request a sample run.
4-7
Advanced Operations
NOTE: Routine sample can be requested on any virtual sample disk. STAT sample can only be requested on the default virtual sample disk. After the system is powered on, the sample disk 1 is the default at that time. If there are any sample runs in Waiting or Running status on a sample disk, the disk is the default at that time. If the system just finishes the runs on a sample disk, the disk is the default at that time. If you request a sample whose sequence number has been used on the current day (the same No., but the different index) and you’ve set the Sample ID and Type (sample type) for it, the system will consider the Sample ID and Type of the former one as those of the current sample. You can change the two parameters only at the Demographics screen.
To view r equested but unt estable samples 1
Click the Ab norm al Sample button and a dialog box pops up. If there are samples that have been requested but not able to test, they will be listed in the dialog box.
2
Select a sample to see the tests it has been requested for.
4-8
Advanced Operations 3
If you want to run the untestable test, you have to find the cause why it is untestable and take some actions. For example, if the test ALB has not been calibrated, it will become testable after being calibrated.
4
If you want to add the sample to the requested test list, tick the combo box to the left of the sample and click the Test button. If you want to select all the samples, tick the combo box to the left of Select Al l. You can see the selected sample at the Test Status screen. If there are untestable tests for the selected sample, the tests will be discarded and you will not see them at the Sample Test screen.
5
Click the Close button.
To vi ew a requested sample run 1
Click the Browse button.
2
Click
or
until the desired sample is reached.
NOTE:
3
Click
to go to the previous sample run.
Click
to go to the next sample run.
After you have finished browsing samples, click the Browse button again to quit the browsing mode.
To edit a requested sampl e run 1
Click the Browse button.
2
Click
or
until the desired sample is reached.
NOTE:
3
Click
to go to the previous sample run.
Click
to go to the next sample run.
Click the Edit button.
4-9
Advanced Operations 4
If you do not want to change the sample information, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, edit the sample information.
NOTE: You can edit routine sample information here only if the sample is in Requested status. You cannot edit STAT sample information here because the STAT sample is in Waiting status after it is requested. Sample Disk , Sample No. and Replicates can’t be edited. You can edit Sample Type and Sample ID only at the Demographics screen. Refer to 4.3.3 Demographics for details.
5
If you do not want to change the assays for the sample, go directly to the next step. Otherwise, select tests and profiles in the As says area or Profiles area. If you want to add an assay or a profile, select it; if you want to delete an assay or a profile, de-select it.
NOTE: You can change the tests or profiles for the sample in any status. You can only delete a test or a profile for the sample in Requested status.
6
Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
7
Repeat from step 2 to edit another sample run; or click the Browse button again to quit the browsing mode.
To delete a sample run in Requested status 1
Click the Browse button.
2
Click
or
until the desired sample is reached.
NOTE: Click
to go to the previous sample run.
Click
to go to the next sample run.
4-10
Advanced Operations 3
Click the Delete button to delete the selected sample.
NOTE: You can only delete the routine sample that is in Requested status here. You cannot delete the STAT sample here because the STAT sample is in Waiting status after it is requested. If you want to delete a requested STAT sample, refer to 4.1.4.1 Sample Disk tab or 4.1.4.3 Sample Test tab for details.
4
Repeat from step 2 to delete another sample run; or click the Browse button again to quit the browsing mode.
To enter the pa tient i nfo rmatio n scr een 1
Click the Demographics button and the Demographics window will pop up. Refer to 4.3.3 Demographic s for details.
To exit the Request Sample screen 1
Click the Close button.
4.1.2 Calibration
Click Routine → Calibration , or press F2, or click the short-cut button enter the Request Calibration screen, as Figure4-2 shows.
Figure4-2 Request Calibration screen
4-11
to
Advanced Operations At the Request Calibration screen, all the available tests are listed. The tests followed by forbidden marks, such as , are those whose calibration parameters have not been set yet and cannot be requested for calibrations. The yellow-framed tests are the double-reagent tests whose reagent positions have already been set. The gray-famed tests are the double-reagent tests whose reagent positions have not been set yet. The selected test will be followed by a green tick. You can select the desired sample disk (virtual disk) from the pull down list of the Sample Disk filed. The default sample disk is Sample Disk1 . The adopted calibration rule and calibrator will be displayed in the Method and Calibrator fields respectively.
To request a ca lib ration r un 1
Click “▼” below Sample Dis k and select the desired sample disk from the pull down list.
2
Click the desired test to select it; click it again to de-select it. The select test will be followed by a green tick. You can select multiple tests for a calibration run.
3
Click the Request button to request a calibration run.
4
Repeat steps 1 - 3 to request another calibration run, or click the Close button to exit the Request Calibration screen.
CAUTION: You must run the calibration if this is the first time the analyzer using Endpoint or Fixed-time method for double-reagent tests. For the Kinetic method, you can directly input the K Factor without running the calibration first (see 4.2.3.2 Rule tab). You need to run the calibration when you have changed the reagents, reagent lots, test parameters, lamp or other analysis conditions. Before calibrating a double-reagent test that uses Endpoint method, the system will run reagent blank test for it automatically.
4-12
Advanced Operations
4.1.3 QC Click Routine → QC, or press the F3 to enter the Request QC screen, as Figure4-3 shows. You can also enter the Request QC screen by clicking the shortcut button .
Figure4-3 Request QC screen
The screen lists all available tests. The tests whose reagent positions have not been set yet are followed by a forbidden symbol, such as , and you cannot request to run them. The double-reagent tests, whose reagent positions have already been set, are yellow-framed; the double-reagent tests, whose reagent positions have not been set yet, are gray-framed. The selected test is followed by a green tick. When any test is selected, its corresponding control information will be displayed in the Controls filed. The default sample disk (virtual disk) is disk 1 and you should select the appropriate sample disk to the actual arrangement.
NOTE: If the auto QC function is enabled (see 4.4.2.1 Routine tab for details) and the QC interval is not 0 (see 4.2.4.3 Setup tab for details), the analyzer will automatically insert QC runs among sample runs and you do not have to request additional QC runs. If the unit (optional) is connected, the ISE will be displayed in the As sayISE s field. Please use Mindray-recommended controls for ISE QC.
To requ est a QC run 1
Click “▼” below Sample Dis k and select the desired sample disk from the pull down list.
4-13
Advanced Operations 2
Click the desired test to select it; click it again to de-select it. The selected test will be followed by a green tick. You may select multiple tests for one run.
. 3
Click the Request button to request a QC run.
4
Repeat steps 1 - 3 to request another QC run, or click the Close button to exit the Request QC screen.
4.1.4 Status Click Routine → Status or press F4 to enter the Status screen, as Figure 4-4 shows. You can also enter the Status screen directly by clicking the button.
Figure 4-4 Status screen
At the Status screen, you can see five tabs:
4-14
Advanced Operations
Sample Disk
Reaction Disk
Sample Test
Calib. Test
QC Test
4.1.4.1 Sample Disk tab The Sample Disk tab displays current status of the sample disk.
Figure 4-5 Sample disk tab
As Figure 4-5 shows the Sample Disk tab consists of three major parts, a sample disk diagram on the left, sample information and tests on the right and operating buttons on the bottom. The sample disk diagram illustrates two circles. Every position consists of two color-coded rings, the inner ring and the outer ring:
positions with blue inner rings represent routine samples;
positions with red inner rings represent STAT samples;
positions with pink inner rings represent controls;
positions with purple inner rings represent calibrators;
positions with dark green outer rings indicate the sample is in Requested status;
positions with orange outer rings indicate the sample is in Waiting status;
positions with green outer rings indicate the sample is in Running status ; positions with blue outer rings indicate the sample is in Finished status;
positions with gray inner and outer rings represent unoccupied positions;
position W with brown inner rings represent reagent blanks;
position W with green inner and outer rings indicates there is no reagent blank.
4-15
Advanced Operations
To check i nformation about a sample and its inc
luded tests
1
Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk field to check the corresponding sample and sample run information.
2
Click the desired position on the selected disk to check the corresponding sample and its included tests.
To delete a sample in Requested or
Waiting status
1
Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk
2
field. Click the desired position on the selected disk. Note that you can only select a sample which test(s) is (are) all in Requested or Waiting status.
3
Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the deletion.
4
Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to cancel deletion.
To release a position (except for the control, calibrator positions and position W) whose scheduled run has finished 1
Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk field.
2
Click the desired position on the selected disk. Note that you can only select a sample which test(s) is (are) all in Finished status.
3
Click the Release button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the release.
4
Click the OK button to confirm the release; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to cancel the release.
To release all the positions (except for the control, calibrator positi ons and position W) whose scheduled run has finished 1
Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk field.
2
Click the Clear button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the clearing.
3
Click the OK button to confirm the clearing; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to cancel the clearing.
To rerun a sample 1
Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk field.
2
Click the desired position on the selected disk. Note that you can only rerun a routine or STAT sample.
4-16
Advanced Operations 3
Select the test or tests need to be included in the rerun. Click the check box to select it. Click the check box again to de-select it.
4
To rerun the selected sample without dilution, go directly to the next step. To dilute the selected sample before the rerun, tick the Diluted field. Only if the dilution parameters of a test have already been set, the sample will be diluted before the rerun.
5
Click the Rerun button to request the selected sample again.
To check th e reacti on cu rve 1
Select the desired sample disk from the pull down list in the Sample Disk field.
2
Click the desired position on the selected disk to check the corresponding sample and its included tests.
3
Click the desired test. Note that you can only select a Finished test.
4
Click the Reaction Curve to check the reaction curve and data of the selected blank runs.
There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter to check the data. 5
If you have no intention to view other results, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button at the Reaction Curve window; or click the Close button and repeat from step 2.
4-17
Advanced Operations 6
Click the Close button to close the Reaction Curve window.
To exit the Sta tus screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Status screen.
4.1.4.2 React io n Disk tab The Reaction Disk tab displays current status of the reaction disk.
Figure 4-6 Reaction Disk tab
As Figure 4-6 shows, the Reaction Disk tab consists of three major parts, a reaction disk diagram on the left, test information, status and results on the right and operating buttons on the bottom. The reaction disk illustrates 80 reaction cuvette positions, all of which are color-coded.
To ch eck th e parameter , status and results 1
Click the desired cuvette position and the corresponding parameters, status and results (for finished runs) will be displayed on the right of the screen.
To ch eck the reactio n cu rve and data 1
Click the desired cuvette in the reaction disk diagram. Note that you can only check the reaction curve and data of the Finished runs.
4-18
Advanced Operations 2
Click the Reaction Curve to check the reaction curve and data of the selected blank runs. There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter to check the data.
3
If you have no intention to view other results, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button at the Reaction Curve window; or click the Close button and repeat from step 1.
4
Click the Close button to close the Reaction Curve window.
To com mand feeder to pr ess segments 1
After loading the segments into the cuvette compartment, click the Push Cuvettes button to command the cuvette feeder to press the newly added segments forward.
NOTE: The Push Cuvettes button is only to command the cuvette feeder to press the cuvette segments forward.
To exit the Sta tus screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Status screen.
4.1.4.3 Sampl e Test tab
Figure 4-7 Sample Test tab
As Figure 4-7 shows, the Sample Test tab consists of the following tabs:
Unfinished Samples
4-19
Advanced Operations
Results by Samples
Results by Tests
Unfinished Samples The Unfinished Samples tab lists all the Requested, Waiting and Running samples of the current day since the latest power-on.
Figure 4-8 Unfinished Samples tab
To vi ew tests requested fo r a sample 1
Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.
2
Select a sample in the Samples field, then you can view the tests requested for the selected sample.
To delete a sample in Requested or
Waiting status
1
Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.
2
Click the Delete button and the Delete Sample dialog box will pop up.
3
Select one or more samples in the Delete Sample dialog box. Click the check box to the left of the sample to select it and click the box again to de-select it. Click the check box to the left of All to select all the displayed samples
4
and click the box again to de-select them. Click the Delete button to delete the select samples. After that, you can see the status of the samples changed to Deleted .
5
Click the Close button to close the Delete Sample dialog box.
4-20
Advanced Operations
NOTE: In the Delete Sample dialog box, you can click the Refresh button to view current samples in Requested or Waiting status.
To view or m odify patient inform ation 1
Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.
2
Select a sample in the Samples field.
3
Click the Demographics button to pop up the Demographics dialog box, and you can view or modify the patient information in the dialog box (refer to 4.3.3 Demographi cs for details).
To vi ew rea ction curve of a finished test 1
Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.
2
Select a sample in the Samples field.
3
Select a test in the Finished status in the As says field.
4
Click the Reaction Curve button to pop up the Reaction Curve screen that shows the reaction curve of the selected test. There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter to check the data.
5
If you have no intention to view other results, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button at the Reaction Curve screen; or click the Close button and repeat from step 2.
6
Click the Close button to close the Reaction Curve window.
To exit the Sta tus screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Status screen.
Results by Samples tab The Results by Samples tab lists all the Finished samples of the current day since the latest power-on. You can print patient reports and edit test results through this tab.
4-21
Advanced Operations Figure 4-9 Results by Samples tab
To select c ertain samples 1
Click the Select button. A dialog box will pop u p.
2
Enter the number of the start sample into the first dialog box that pops up and then click the OK button. A second dialog box will then pop up.
3
Enter the number of the end sample into the second dialog box that pops up and click the OK button to select the two samples and those between them.
To d e-select c ertain sampl es 1
Click the Deselect button and a dialog box will pop up.
4-22
Advanced Operations 2
Enter the number of the start sample into the dialog box that pops up and then click the OK button. Another dialog box will then pop up.
3
Enter the number of the end sample into the second dialog box that pops up and click the OK button to de-select the two samples and those between them.
To view reactio n cur ve 1
Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.
2
Select a sample in the Samples field.
3
Select a test in the As say s field.
4
Click Reaction Curve selected test.
to check the reaction curve and data of the
There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter to check the data. 5
If you have no intention to view other results, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button at the Reaction Curve screen; or click the Close button and repeat from step 2.
6
Click the Close button to close the Reaction Curve screen.
To pri nt out a patient report 1
Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.
2
Select the desired sample or samples in the Samples field. You can use the Select button or select them one by one.
3
Click the Print Pat. Report button and a print preview window will pop up. At the Print Preview window, you may choose Pr. Series (series printing) for your impact printer; you may choose Pr. Current (printing current page) or Pr. Al l (printing all pages) for other types of printers.
NOTE: You can click
(to the first page),
previous page), (to the next page) or last page) to go to the desired page.
(to the (to the
Pr. Current refers to printing the page currently displayed on the screen. Pr. All refers to printing all the pages of the selected sample runs.
4-23
Advanced Operations 4
When the printing is done, click the Close button to exit the Print Preview window.
To edit s ample results NOTE: Sample results can only be edited by authorized personnel.
1 2
Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field. Select a sample in the Samples field.
3
Select a test in the As say s field.
4
Click the Edit button.
5
Enter the new value in the edit box to the right of Result .
6
If you want to save the new results, click the Save button; otherwise, click the Cancel button.
NOTE: You can only edit sample results of the current day since the latest power-on here.
To pri nt daily summary To print daily summary is to print out all the patient results of a certain day. You can only use an impact printer for this purpose. Before printing, ensure the analyzer is not doing anything related to an analysis. 1
Click the Print Daily Summary button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the printing.
4-24
Advanced Operations 2
Click the OK button to confirm the printing; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to abort the printing. Once you click the OK button, another dialog box will pop up to ask you to select a printer.
3
If the printer is not an impact one, click the Cancel button; Otherwise, click the OK button and another dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the date of which the patient results you want to print.
4
Enter the date (the default is the current date) and click the OK button to print out the patient results; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to abort the printing. If there is no result of the entered date, a dialog box will pop up to alert you. Click the OK button to close the dialog box and abort the printing.
To exit the Sta tus screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Status screen.
Results by Tests The Results by Tests tab lists all the finished sample tests of the current day since the latest power-on. You can print the test report and revise results through this tab.
Figure 4-10 Results by Tests tab
4-25
Advanced Operations
To select certain t ests 1
Click the Select button. A dialog box will pop u p.
2
Enter the number of the start test into the box first will dialog box that then click the OK button. A second dialog then pop up.pops up and
3
Enter the number of the end test into the second dialog box that pops up and click the OK button to select the two tests and those between them.
To de-select certain tests 1
Click the Deselect button and a dialog box will pop up.
2
Enter the number of the start test into the dialog box that pops up and then click the OK button. Another dialog box will then pop up.
3
Enterclick the number the end test into the dialog that between pops up and the OK of button to de-select thesecond two tests andbox those them.
To view reactio n cur ve 1
Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.
4-26
Advanced Operations 2
Select the desired test.
3
Click Reaction Curve selected test.
to check the reaction curve and data of the
There two Data tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, Reac. tab and theare Reac. tab. Click the former to check thethe curve andCurve the latter to check the data. 4
If you have no intention to view other results on the current virtual sample disk, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button at the Reaction Curve screen; or click the Close button and repeat from step 2.
5
Click the Close button to close the Reaction Curve screen.
To pri nt out a test report 1
Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.
2
Select the desired test or tests. You can use the Select button or select them one by one.
3
Click the Print Test Report button and a print preview window will pop up. At the Print Preview window, you may choose Pr. Series (series printing) for your impact printer; you may choose Pr. Current (printing current page) or Pr. Al l (printing all pages) for other types of printers.
4
When the printing is done, click the Close button to exit the Print Preview window.
To revis e sample results NOTE: Sample results can only be revised by authorized personnel. If you are not authorized to revise the results, a dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the authorized user name and password.
1
Select a virtual sample disk in the Sample Disk field.
4-27
Advanced Operations 2
Select a test or tests. You can use the Select button or select them one by one.
3
Click the Correct button.
4
Enter values in the edit boxes to the right of Factor a: and Factor b:.
5
If you want to revise the tests with the formula Y=aX+b (Y stands for the new result and X stands for the old result), click the Save button; otherwise, click the Cancel button. After clicking the Save button, you can see the test result in the Finished Tests field have been changed to the new ones.
NOTE: You can only revise the sample results of the current day since the latest power-on here.
To exit the Sta tus screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Status screen.
4.1.4.4 Cali b. Test tab The Calib . Test tab lists the calibration runs of the current day since the latest power-on.
4-28
Advanced Operations Figure 4-11 Calib. Test tab
To view calibration test status 1
Select a calibration test in the As says field. You can view the basic information and the status of the selected test and the results of the Finished tests.
To delete a R equested or Wa iti ng cali bratio n ru n 1
Select the desired calibration run in Requested or Waiting status. You can only delete one run at a time.
2
Click the Delete button to delete the selected run.
To check reaction curv e of calibration ru ns 1
Select a Finished calibration run in the As say s field.
4-29
Advanced Operations 2
Select a calibrator from the Calibration Status zone.
3
Click the Reaction Curve and a window will pop up to display the corresponding reaction curve.
There are two tabs in the Reaction Curve screen: the Reac. Curve tab and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter to check the data.
4
Go directly to the next step if you have no intention to check other results; Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button to view other results (not only the results of calibrations) or click the Close button and then repeat from step 1.
5
Click the Close button to close the Reaction Curve window.
4-30
Advanced Operations
To view calibration curve 1
Select a Finished calibration test in the As say s field.
2
Click the Calib. Curve button to display the calibration curve and the calibration result.
To print the displayed curve and result, click the Print button. 3
Click the Return button to exit the Calibration Curve
window.
To exit the Sta tus screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Status screen.
4.1.4.5 QC Test tab The QC Test tab lists the QC runs of the current day since the latest power-on.
4-31
Advanced Operations Figure4-12 QC Test tab
To vi ew status of QC run 1
Select a QC run in the As says field. You can view the parameters and the status of the selected run and the results of the Finished runs.
To view reactio n cur ve of QC runs 1
Select a finished QC run from the Assay s field.
2
Select a control from the QC Status field.
3
Click the Reaction Curve and a window will pop up to display the corresponding reaction curve.
4-32
Advanced Operations
There are two tabs in the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter to check the data.
4
Go directly to the next step if you have no intention to check other results; Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button to view other results (not only the results of QCs) or click the Close button and then repeat from step 1.
5
Click the Close button to close the Reactive Curve window.
To delet e a requ ested QC run 1
Select the desired Requested QC run. You can only delete one run at a time.
2
Click the Delete button to delete the selected run.
4-33
Advanced Operations
To exit the Sta tus screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Status screen.
4.1.5 Start Start is used to run the requested tests. If the current tests are paused, Start will change to Resume that is used to continue the paused tests.
Start tests 1 Click Routine Start or press F5, or click the short-cut button pop up the following dialog box. →
2
to
In the Select Samples dialog box, select a virtual sample disk to the right of Sample Disk .
NOTE: If there are any requested STAT samples on the current default virtual sample disk, you can only select the disk.
4-34
Advanced Operations 3
In the Select Samples dialog box, select samples to be run in the Select sample to be run field. If you select All Sampl es, go directly to the step 5; if you select Selected Samples , go to the next step.
NOTE: If you select Al l Sampl es, the system will run all the Requested samples (Waiting STAT samples included), calibrations and QC tests. If you select Selected Samples , the system will run some Requested samples, calibrations and QC tests. When Selected Samples is selected, the Select Samples field is available.
4
In the Select Samples dialog box, select tests to be run in the Select Samples field.
If you want to run sample tests, select the check box to the left of Sample No. and enter the sample No. in the edit boxes to the right of it. The system will run the Requested samples whose IDs are between the two numbers (including the two numbers). If you want to run calibration tests, select the check box to the left of Calibration and select tests below it. If you want to run QC tests, select the check box to left of QC and select tests below it.
4-35
Advanced Operations 5
If you want to continue, click the OK button; otherwise, click the Cancel button. When you click the OK button, a dialog box will pop up.
6
Select a virtual reagent disk in the Select Reagent Disk dialog box.
7
If you want to run the selected tests, click the OK button; otherwise, click the Cancel button and the system will not run the selected tests. When you click the OK button, the status of the selected tests changes to Waiting and the system will run the tests that use the reagents on the selected virtual disk immediately.
NOTE: If the system finishes the tests that use the reagents on the selected virtual reagent disk, and there are waiting tests that use reagents on the other disk, a dialog box will pop up to remind you. Click the OK button to exit the dialog box. After replacing the reagent disk, click the Resume button to continue the tests that use reagents on the other disk. Refer to the following contents for details.
Resume t ests 1
When the system is paused, click Routine
→
Resume or press F5, or
click the short-cut button to continue the tests. The system will take different operations according to different conditions. Refer to the following steps for details. 2
If there is no test in Requested status and no need to replace the reagent disk, the system will continue the tests directly.
3
If there is no test in Requested status but you need to replace the reagent disk, the following dialog box will pop up.
After selecting a virtual reagent disk in the dialog box, click OK to continue the tests or click Cancel to abort running.
4-36
Advanced Operations 4
If there are tests in Requested status, the following dialog box will pop up.
If you want to continue the tests currently being paused, click Cancel button; If you want not only to continue the tests currently being paused but also to run the tests in Requested status, select tests and click the OK button. After that, if there is no need to replace the reagent disk, the system will continue the tests; if you want to replace the reagent disk, a dialog box will pop up.
After selecting a virtual reagent disk in the dialog box, click OK to continue the tests or click Cancel to abort running.
4.1.6 Probe Stop
Click Routine → Probe Stop , or press F6, or click the short-cut button to stop the sample and reagent probes and the mixing bar without stopping the reaction disk. You may use this function to add more samples or reagents without stopping the analysis. This menu is only functional when the system is testing.
NOTE: Do not put the probes and the bar on hold for too long. Otherwise, certain analyses may be affected.
4-37
Advanced Operations
4.1.7 Stop
Click Routine → Stop , or press F8, or click the short-cut button current run. This menu is only functional when the system is testing.
to stop the
NOTE: Mindray recommends this stop function not be used unless it is necessary (for instance the analyzer is experiencing problems). When the analyzer is experiencing a serious problem, the analyzer will be stopped automatically. After the analyzer is stopped, all the remaining runs will be invalidated and return to the Requested status, but the finished runs will be saved. To continue these runs, click the short-cut button
.
4.1.8 Exit When you have finished all analyses and the system is in the idle status, click Routine → Exit , or press F10, or to click the short-cut button to exit the control system. A dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the exiting operation.
Click the OK button and another dialog box will pop up to ask you to load detergents.
NOTE: Please use Mindray-recommended detergents: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid, or 0.5% (V/V) Javel water. Use of other detergents may lead to inaccurate results. Do not use other detergents.
4-38
Advanced Operations Ensure acid and alkaline detergents are loaded to positions 45 and 47 respectively and then click the OK button and the analyzer will start the following shutdown procedure: 1
Back up the data in database and unloads the used cuvettes.
2
Carry out the washing procedure: washing the sample probe, reagent probe and mixing bar for three times respectively with the acid and alkaline detergents.
3
Wash the analyzing unit with deionized water as defined by Times of Auto Washing(Startup/Shutdown) at the System Setup Routine screen.
4
Unloads the first cuvette segment.
When the shutdown procedure is done, a dialog box will pop up to remind you that you can shutdown the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF safely. Click the OK button to exit the control software.
4.1.9 Emergency Exit When the analyzer is experiencing a serious problem, you need to click Routine → Emergency Exit , or press CTRL+F12 to exit the control system without doing the shutdown procedure.
NOTE: Use this emergency exit function only when the analyzer is experiencing a serious problem.
4.2
Parameters
4.2.1 As say The As say Parameters screen is where you set parameters regarding the tests, calculation tests, profiles, carryover and off-system tests. To enter the As say Paramet ers screen, click Parameters →As say , or press the F11 key on the keyboard.
4-39
Advanced Operations
NOTE: If you are not authorized to edit the test parameters, a dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the authorized user name and password.
Figure 4-13 Assay Parameters screen
At the As say Parameters screen, shown in Figure 4-13, you can see the following tabs:
Parameters
Reference Range
Calculation
Profile
Carryover
Off-system
Follow the instructions given below to set them.
4-40
Advanced Operations
4.2.1.1 Parameters tab
Figure 4-14 Parameters tab
The Parameters tab consists of three main parts, the upper part being the parameters to be set for the selected test, the middle part being all the tests whose parameters are set already, the lower part being the operating buttons. In the middle part, yellow-framed tests are the double-reagent tests whose reagent positions are set already; theyet; gray-framed tests are the double-reagent teststests. whose reagent positions are not set the non-framed tests are the single-reagent Follow the instructions given below to set the parameters for the selected test. Parameter
What it does
How to set
No.
It is the system-generated number assigned to the current test.
It is system-generated and you can’t set it.
As say
Defines the identification of the test to be set.
Enter maximum 20 letters, digits for the identification.
Type
Defines the analysis method to be used on the current test.
Select one of the three listed methods: Endpoint, Fixe d ti me and Kinetic , from the pull-down list.
Reaction
Defines how the absorbance changes during the reaction
Select As cendi ng or Descending from the pull-down list.
process, ascends (the absorbance increasing with the reaction) or descends (the absorbance decreasing with the reaction). Units
Defines the unit in which the test result is to be expressed.
4-41
Select the desired unit from the pull-down list.
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set
Precision
Defines the decimal places of the test result.
Enter the desired integer (0-5) into the edit box to the right of Precision ; or click on the right of the edit box until the desired integer is reached.
Prim. Wave.
Defines the primary wavelength to be used on the test.
Select one of the seven wavelengths (340, 405, 450, 510, 546, 578, 630, 670 and 700) from the pull-down list.
Sec.
Defines
secondary
Select one of the seven wavelengths
Wave.
wavelength to be used on the test.
(340, 405, 450, 510, 546, 578, 630, 670 and 700) from the pull-down list.
Sample Vol.
Defines the sample volume (3-45µl) to be dispensed for the reaction.
Enter the desired number (must be the multiple of 0.5) into the edit box to the right of Sample Vol. ; or click on the right of the edit box until the desired number is reached.
R1 Vol.
Defines the volume (180-450 µl) of the first reagent to be dispensed for the reaction.
Enter the desired integer (180-450) into the edit box to the right of R1 Vol..
Defines the volume (30-450 µl) of the second reagent to be dispensed for the reaction.
Enter the desired integer (30-450) into the edit box to the right of R2 Vol..
R2 Vol.
the
Note the entered Sample Vol. + R1 Vol. must be 183µl -500µl.
Note Sample Vol.-500µl. + R1 Vol. +the R2 entered Vol. must be 183µl Lin. Limit
Applies to the Kinetic type only. It ranges from 1 to 10 and the default value is 20. The analyzer will automatically calculate the linearity within the measurement time and compare the result to the line limit and flag the result exceeding the defined limit. The formula to calculate the linearity is as follows: (1)When more than 9 points are measured Linearity = (absorbance change of the first 6 points – absorbance change of the last 6 points)/(absorbance change of all the points) (2)When the 4 ≤number of measured points ≤8 Linearity = (absorbance change of the first 3 points –
4-42
Enter the desired value (1-100) into the edit box.
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set
absorbance change of the last 3 points)/(absorbance change of all the points) Inc. Time
Applies only double-reagent tests.
to
Enter the desired integer (1-60) into the edit box to the right of Inc. Time .
Defines the interval (counted in periods. One period equals 12 seconds) between the point the sample is dispensed and the point the second reagent is dispensed. R. Time
Defines the reaction time (counted in periods. One period equals 12 seconds). For the Endpoint method, the reaction time refers to the interval between the start of the reaction and the end of the reaction; for the Kinetic or Fixed time method, the reaction time refers to the interval between the point when the reaction becomes stabilized and the point when the reaction is no longer monitored.
Find the corresponding integers listed on the instructions of the reagent and enter them into the edit boxes to the right of R. Time.
The entered integers must be no less than -40 and no greater than 100.
Enter the end time, which is no less than 0 and no greater 100, into the second box. The end time must be greater than the start time. For any test to be analyzed by the Kinetic method, the end time must be greater than the start time 7 at least.
The analyzer defines the start time of the reaction as 0. For the single-reagent test the start time refers to the point when the sample is dispensed; For the double-reagent test, the start time refers to the point when the second reagent is dispensed. An ti gen
Defines whether the analyzer should check for surplus antigen. When the antibody reacts with the antigen, the amount of the product is closely related to their proportion. Only the appropriate proportion can introduce the maximum amount of the product and when this happens, the transmitted light is minimized and the
4-43
Enter the start time into the first box. For the single-reagent test to be analyzed by the Endpoint method, the start time is 0; For the double-reagent test to be analyzed by the Endpoint method, the start time can be negative (-incubation time-100); For any test to be analyzed by the Kinetic or Fixed time method, the start time must be positive.
Click the check box to the right of An ti gen to enable the check; Click it again to disable the check.
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set
largest absorbance is obtained. Any other proportion will lead to a less absorbance and when this happens, samples of significantly different antigen concentrations may have the same test results. The surplus antigen threshold (An ti gen) refers to the maximum or minimum PC when there is no surplus antigen. It only applies to the Endpoint tests to be analyzed using the antigen-antibody reaction. When 1/3 of the reaction time has elapsed, at least 80% of the reaction should be finished. Otherwise, there is surplus antigen. Calculation: (1)For the calibrator of the maximum concentration: threshold = 2*(absorbance of the last point - absorbance taken at 1/3 reaction time) / (absorbance of the last point + absorbance taken at 1/3 reaction time) (2)The above formula applies to samples(including controls) as well (3)For a reaction, if:
descending
the calculated threshold of the sample (including controls) is less than that of the maximum-concentration calibrator, and the absorbance of the last point of the sample (including controls) is greater than that of the maximum-concentration calibrator then there antigen.
is
surplus
(4)For a ascending reaction,
4-44
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set
if : the calculated threshold of the sample (including controls) is greater than that of the maximum-concentration calibrator, and the absorbance of the last point of the sample (including controls) than that of is less the maximum-concentration calibrator then there antigen. Substrate
is
surplus
Defines whether the analyzer should check for surplus substrate and applies only to the Kinetic and Fixed time method.
Enter the desired number (0-2.5). When the entered number is 0, the analyzer does not check for surplus substrate.
Certain highly concentrated (active) sample may consume the substrate shortly. When it happens, the reaction is no longer a th 0 -order (kinetic) or first-order (fixed-time) one, which may lead to wrong results. This parameter is defined to prevent that from happening. It refers to the absorbance corresponding to the critical point of the linear and non-linear regions (for the Kinetic) or of the first-order and multiple-order regions. It is the minimum (descending curve) or maximum (ascending curve) absorbance within the given reaction time and there is still substrate left. Response
Defines allowed maximum (for ascending reaction) or
Find the corresponding values on the instructions of the reagent and
minimum (for descending reaction) absorbance (for the Endpoint method) or absorbance change rate (for other methods).
enter them respectively to the edit boxes to the right of L Limit and U Limit in the Response field.
4-45
Enter 0s into both the edit boxes if there is no restriction on the response.
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set
S. Volume
Defines the volume of the sample to be diluted.
Enter the desired integer (3-45). S. Volum e and Ratio must meet the following requirement: 120 ≤ (SampleVol. × ( Dilution + 1)) ≤ 500
Defines the dilution ratio.
Ratio
Enter the desired integer (2-150). S. Volum e and Ratio must meet the following requirement: 120 ≤ (SampleVol. × (Dilution + 1)) ≤ 500
Defines the allowed absorbance range of the R1 blank (R1 refers to the reagent of a single-reagent test or the first reagent of the double-reagent test). The analyzer will flag the blank result that is beyond the defined range.
Find the corresponding values on the instructions of the reagent and enter them into the edit boxes to the right of L Limit and U Limit in the R1 Blank field.
Defines the allowed absorbance range of the mixture (reagents + sample) of the double-reagent test. The analyzer will flag the blank result that is beyond the defined range.
Find corresponding values on the instruction of the reagent and enter them into the edit boxes to the right of L Limit and U Limit in the Mix. R. Blank field.
Defines the range in which the reaction result is linear with the response (R). The analyzer will flag the blank result that is beyond the defined range.
Find the corresponding values on the instructions of the reagent and enter them into the edit boxes to the right of L Limit and U Limit in the Linearity field.
Full Name
Defines the full name of the current test.
Enter maximum 60 letters, digits and/or symbols into the edit box to the right of Full Name .
Print No.
Defines a printing number for the current test.
Enter the desired integer into the edit box to the right of Print No.
R1 Blank
Mix. Blank
R.
Linearity
Entering 0s into both the edit boxes means there is no need to check the R1 blank.
Entering 0s into both the edit boxes means there is no need to check the reagent blank of the mixture.
Entering 0s into both the edit boxes means there is no need to check the linearity.
NOTE: Please define the parameters as instructed by this operation manual and the instructions of the reagent suppliers. Improper settings may lead to unreliable test results.
4-46
Advanced Operations
To vi ew the para meters of a specific test 1
Go to the middle part of the tab and click the desired test and then the upper part will show the parameters of the specific test.
To add a new t est 1
Click the Add button.
2
Enter the parameters as instructed by the instruction of the reagents.
3
Click the Save button to save the setting; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the setting.
NOTE: If there are any obligatory parameters missing, once you click the Save button, the analyzer will automatically red-frame the missing parameters (or pops up a dialog box to warning you about it) and disables the Save button. You need to set the missing parameters and try to save the settings again.
To del ete a test 1
Go to the middle part of the tab and click the desired test.
2
Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the deletion.
3
Click the OK button to delete the test; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the deletion.
NOTE:
Once you have confirmed to delete the selected test, the analyzer will delete all the parameters, including the reagent parameters, calibration parameters, and QC parameters, related to the test. Ensure the right test is selected before confirming the deletion.
4-47
Advanced Operations
To edit a test 1
Go to the middle part of the tab and click the desired test.
2
Click the Edit button.
3
Go back to the upper part of the tab to edit the test as you need.
4
Click the Save button to save the change; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the change. Once you have clicked the Save button, if the changed parameters change analysis conditions, a dialog box will pop up to remind you to re-calibrate. Click the OK button. If the changed parameters do not change analysis conditions, this dialog box will not pop up.
A dialog box will pop up to ask you whether to delete other parameters related to this test.
If you click the OK button, the analyzer will save the changed parameters and clear all other unchanged ones, including the corresponding reagent parameters, calibration parameters, and QC parameters; if you click the Cancel button, the analyzer will save the changed parameters and keep the other related parameters unchanged.
NOTE: Once you have clicked the OK button, the analyzer will delete all the parameters, including the reagent parameters, calibration parameters, and QC parameters, related to the test. Ensure the right test is selected before confirming the deletion.
To exit the Assay Parameters sc reen 1
Click the Close button to exit the As say Paramet ers screen.
4-48
Advanced Operations
4.2.1.2 Referen ce Range tab
Figure 4-15 Reference Range tab
Click the Reference Range tab to edit or view the expected means of the test, as Figure 4-15 shows. Parameter
What it does
How to set
As say
Selects the test to be set.
Directly select the desired test from the pull down list or click (to check the previous test) or button (to check the next test) until the desired test is found.
Sample Type
Defines to which type the sample belongs.
Select one of the following four types from the pull down list: Serum , Plasma , Urine and Others .
Sex
Defines the gender of the patient.
Select one of the following four types from the pull down list: Male, Female, Others and blank.
Patient Demographics (Figure 4-16)
Defines means for different Maximum groups
Tick the patient group sequentially from No.1 and enter the desired year and month in the Years and Months columns to define the upper and lower limits of the patient ages. Enter the
expected patients of ages. 6 patient can be
defined.
desired upper and lower limits for the age groups. You must not leave the any box blank. The first Years box is for the lower limit of the age and the second Years box is for the upper limit. Both the entered values must be 0-150 and the upper limit must be greater than or equal to the lower limit. For adult or pediatric patients older
4-49
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set than one year, you can only enter 0s to both the Months boxes. In case of patients younger than one year, enter the lower limit into the first Months and the upper limit into the Months limit. Both the entered values must be 0-12 and the upper limit must be greater than or equal to the lower limit.
Default (Figure 4-17)
For a given test and sample type and
Enter the lower limit into the first box and the upper limit into the second.
patient gender, defines the expected range of the test results for patients of all ages.
You can leave either of the boxes, but not both the boxes, empty. If you entered values into both the boxes, ensure that 0 ≤ lower limit
The expected range defined for a particular patient group supersedes this default range.
Figure 4-16 Patient demographics
Figure 4-17 Setting default expected range
To vi ew the expected m eans 1
Click “▼” to the right of As say and select the desired test from the pull down list.
2
Click “▼” to the right of Sample Type and select the desired type from the pull down list.
4-50
Advanced Operations 3
Click “▼” to the right of Sex and select the desired gender from the pull down list. The pre-set expected means will then be displayed.
To set expected means 1
Click “▼” to the right of As say and select the desired test from the pull down list.
2
Click “▼” to the right of Sample Type and select the desired type from the pull down list.
3
Click “▼” to the right of Sex and select the desired gender from the pull down list.
4
Click the Set button.
5
Tick the check box of the first patient group and set the Years, Month s, Lower Limit and Upper Limit field as instructed above.
6
Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
NOTE: In case of inappropriate settings, a dialog box will pop up to alert you once you have clicked the Save button.
To exit the Assay Parameters sc reen 1
Click the Close button to exit the As say Parameters screen.
4.2.1.3 Calcul atio n tab Calculate certain tests to derive certain new tests of clinical purpose, such as A/G, TBil-DBil and so forth. The Calculation tab is where you set the parameters related to such calculation.
4-51
Advanced Operations Figure 4-18 Calculation tab
As Figure 4-18 shows, the Calculation tab consists of four major parts: the parameters on the upper left, all the available tests on the upper right, calculation formula on the middle and operating buttons on the bottom. The parameters are interpreted as follows. Parameter
What it does
No.
Assigns
How to set a
Use the system-generated
system-generated number to the current calculated test.
number.
As say
Defines the name of the test.
Enter the desired name (maximum 20 letters) into the edit box.
Units
Selects one of the units for the test.
Select the desired unit from the pull down list.
Precision
Defines how many decimal places (0 - 6) the test result should have.
Enter the desired integer or
Ref. Range
Defines the expected range of the test result.
Enter the lower limit into the first edit box and the upper into the second. If you enter 0s into both the boxes, it means no specific range defined for the test result.
Full Name
Defines full name of the test.
Enter maximum 60 letters into the edit box.
Print No.
Defines the user-assigned printing order.
Enter the desired integer into the edit box.
4-52
click the button until the desired number is reached.
Advanced Operations
To ch eck the paramete rs of a calcu lated test 1
Select the desire test from the Assays field, or click until the desired test is reached.
or
NOTE: Click
to go to the previous test.
Click
to go to the last test.
The related parameters will be displayed on the screen.
Ad d a n ew c alc ul ated tes t 1
Click the Ad d button.
2
Enter the related parameters as instructed above.
3
Select the tests to be involved in the calculation from the Assay s field.
4-53
Advanced Operations 4
Click the Add to List button to add the selected tests to the calculation list.
NOTE: In case you add inappropriate tests to the calculation list by mistake, click the Clear button to clear the list and then re-select appropriate tests to add to the list.
5
Edit the calculation formula by clicking a selected test from the calculation list and click the Ad d to Formu la button to add the test to the Formula field. Clicking the digit buttons (0-9) and operator buttons (+, -, and so forth) to associate the test with appropriated digits and operators as needed by the desired calculation formula. Repeat this step on every selected test until the desired calculation formula is completed.
NOTE: To clear a mistake, click the Clear Formula button to clear the formula and re-edit it the right way.
Example: to edit ALT-AST+TP, first select ALT from the calculation list and then click the Ad d to Formu la button to add the test to the Formula field. Click the – button to associate the ALT with the minus sign. Select AST from the calculation list and click the Ad d to Formu la button to add the test to the Formula field, following the minus sign. Click the + button to associate the AST test. Select TP from the calculation list and click Ad d t o Formula . Thus, the desired formula is completed.
6
Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
To delete a calcul ated test 1
Select the test to delete from the pull down list on the middle left of the screen.
4-54
Advanced Operations 2
Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the deletion.
3
Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to cancel the deletion.
To edit a calculated test 1
Select the test to edit from the pull down list on the middle left of the screen.
2
Edit the formula as needed.
NOTE: In case you add inappropriate tests to the calculation list by mistake, click the Clear button to clear the list and then re-select appropriate tests to add to the list. To clear a mistake, click the Clear Formula button to clear the formula and re-edit it the right way.
3
Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
To exit the Assay Parameters 1
screen
Click the Close button to exit the As say Parameters screen.
4.2.1.4 Prof il e tab Tests grouped together for certain clinical purpose (for instance liver function) constitute a profile.
4-55
Advanced Operations Figure 4-19 Profile tab
As the figure shows, the Profile tab consists of three major parts: existing profiles (groups) on the left, available tests (tests have no assigned reagent positions are followed by a forbidden mark) on the right and operating buttons on the bottom.
To check the tests incl uded in a profi le (group) 1
Select the desired group from the pull down list of the Profile Name field or from the Profile List field. The included tests will be followed a green tick.
To add a new pr ofi le 1
Click the Add button.
2
Enter an appropriate profile name into the edit box of the Profile Name field.
3
Select the tests to be included. The selected tests will be followed by a green tick. Clicking the ticked test again may de-select the test.
4
Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the settings.
4-56
Advanced Operations
To d elete a profi le 1
Select the desired group from the pull down list of the Profile Name field or from the Profile List field.
2
Click the Delete button to delete the selected profile.
3
Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to cancel the deletion.
To edit a pr ofi le 1
Select the desired group from the pull down list of the Profile Name field or from the Profile List field.
2
Click the Edit button.
3
Select or de-select the tests as you need. The selected tests will be followed by a green tick. Clicking the ticked test again may de-select the test.
4
Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
To exit the As say Para meters sc reen 1
Click the Close to exit the As say Parame ters screen.
4.2.1.5 Carryo ver tab Various reagents are sampled by the reagent probe and carryover between the adjacent reagents, though minimized by the washing process, is still a factor to be taken into account. This carryover may impose serious effect on certain reagents and consequently on the related test results. This Carryover tab is designed so that you can minimize this effect by keeping the tests whose reagents may affect each other as far away from each other as possible, or, if this is not an option, ordering extra probe washing before analyzing those tests.
4-57
Advanced Operations Figure 4-20 Carryover tab
As the figure shows, the Carryover parameters screen consists of three major parts: current reagents listed in the current field on the upper, the reagents that may be affected (contaminated) by the current reagents listed in the contaminated field on the lower, and operating buttons on the bottom. Note that the yellow reagents are the first reagents of the double-reagent tests and the blue reagents are the second reagents of the double-reagent tests.
To ch eck the carr yover parameters 1
Click the desired reagent from the current field and the selected reagent will be followed by a green tick. Check the contaminated field and the tests followed by a red tick are those that may be affected by the current reagent.
To set t he carryov er parame ters f or a reagent 1
Click the Set button.
2
Select the desired reagent from the current field. The selected reagent will be followed by a green tick. Clicking the ticked reagent again may de-select it.
3
Check the contaminated field and click the reagents that may be affected by the current test. The selected reagent will be followed by a red tick.
4
Clicking the ticked reagent again may de-select it. Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the settings.
4-58
Advanced Operations
To clear the carryov er setting s of a reage nt 1
Click the desired reagent from the current field and the selected reagent will be followed by a green tick. Check the contaminated field and the tests followed by a red tick are those that may be affected by the current reagent.
2
Click the Clear button and you will see all the red ticks have disappeared.
To exit the Assay Parameters sc reen 1
Click the Close button to exit the As say Paramet ers screen.
4.2.1.6 Off-s yst em tab All the tests that are not run by the BS-300 are referred to as the off-system tests, given you have to manually enter the test results into the analyzer if you want to use it to print out the results. You can set basic information of off-system tests at the Off-system tab. Refer to 4.3.4.1 Results tab for details regarding entering the test results manually.
Figure 4-21 Off-system tab
As the figure shows, the Off-system
tab consists of mainly three parts: the
parameters on the upper left, the tests on the upper right and the operating buttons on the bottom. The parameters are interpreted as follows. Parameter
What it does
How to set
No.
Assigns a system-generated number to the current calculated test.
Use the number.
4-59
system-generated
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set
As say
Defines the name of the test.
Enter the desired name (maximum 20 letters) into the edit box.
Precision
Defines how many decimal places (0 - 6) the test result should have.
Enter the desired integer or click the button until the desired number is reached.
Units
Selects one of the units for the test.
Select the desired unit from the pull down list.
Lower Limit
Defines the lower limit of the expected range of the test result.
Enter the desired into the edit box.
Defines the upper limit of the expected range of the test result.
Enter the desired into the edit box.
Print No.
Defines the user-assigned printing order.
Enter the desired integer into the edit box.
Full Name
Defines full name of the test.
Enter maximum 60 letters into the edit box.
Property
Defines property of the test.
Select Quantitative or Qualitative from the pull down list.
Upper Limi t
If you enter 0s for both the lower and upper limits, it means no specific range defined for the test result.
If you enter 0s for both the lower and upper limits, it means no specific range defined for the test result.
To check t he parameters of an off -system test 1
Select the desire test from the test list and its parameters will be displayed on the screen.
To add a new off -system test 1
Click the Ad d button.
2
Enter the parameters.
3
Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the settings.
To delete an off -system t est 1
Select the desire test from the test list.
4-60
Advanced Operations 2
Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the deletion.
3
Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to cancel the deletion.
To edit an off -system test 1
Select the desired test from test list.
2
Click the Edit button.
3
Edit its parameters as needed.
4
Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
To exit the Assay Parameters sc reen 1
Click the Close button to exit the As say Parameters screen.
4.2.2 Reagent To enter the Reagent Parameters screen, click Parameters → Reagent , or press F12.
NOTE: If you are not authorized to change the reagent parameters, a dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the authorized user name and password.
4-61
Advanced Operations Figure 4-22 Reagent Parameters screen
At the Reagent screen, Figure 4-22, you can see two tabs:
Reagent Dis k
Inventory
The Reagents Disk tab is where you set the parameters regarding the reagents. The Inventory tab is where you check the remaining reagents and print the checking results.
4.2.2.1 Reagent Disk tab Click the Reagent Disk tab to edit or view the reagent disk status, as Figure 4-23 shows.
4-62
Advanced Operations Figure 4-23 Reagent Disk tab
There are two virtual reagent disks, disk 1 and disk 2. As the reagent disk diagram shows, the reagent disk has 50 reagent positions, 25 on the inner circle and marked even number and another 25 on the outer circle and marked odd numbers. All the reagent positions are color-coded: white for the empty positions; green for the positions occupied by reagents for the single-reagent tests; red for the positions occupied by reagents for the double-reagent tests; blue for the positions (49 and 50) occupied by distilled water. Note that you cannot use the two blue positions for other purposes. The list to the right of the reagent disk diagram displays all the tests that have been set. The reagent parameters are interpreted as follows. Parameter
What it does
Rgt. Disk
Displays the current virtual reagent disk.
R1
Defines the position for reagent 1.
R2
Defines the position for reagent 2. Note that this parameter is not available for single-reagent tests.
R1 Inventor y
Uses a color bar to display how much reagent left in the R1 bottle. The color can represent maximum 100ml of the reagent. When the remaining reagent is still more than half of the bottle, the color bar appears green; When the remaining reagent is between 1/4 and 1/2 of the bottle, the color bar appears yellow; When the remaining reagent is less than 1/4 of the bottle, and the color bar appears red. The box to the right of the color bar displays how many tests the remaining reagent is enough for.
R2 Inventor y
Uses a color bar to display how much reagent left in the R2 bottle. The color can represent maximum 100ml of the reagent.
4-63
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does When the remaining reagent is still more than half of the bottle, the color bar appears green; When the remaining reagent is between 1/4 and 1/2 of the bottle, the color bar appears yellow; When the remaining reagent is less than 1/4 of the bottle, and the color bar appears red. The box to the right of the color bar displays how many tests the remaining reagent is enough for.
R1 Bottle
Defines the bottle used by reagent 1.
R2 Bottle
Defines the bottle used by reagent 2. Note that this parameter is not available for single-reagent tests.
To vi ew the reage nt parameters of a specif ic t est 1
Click “▼” to the right of Rgt. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent disk from the pull down list.
2
Click the desired test in the test list.
To view th e reagent parame ters of a specific r eagent pos iti on 1
Click “▼” to the right of Rgt. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent disk from the pull down list.
2
Click the desired position in the reagent disk diagram.
To set r eagent parameters for a new test 1
Click “▼” to the right of Rgt. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent disk from the pull down list. The positions of the reagents will be set on the selected virtual reagent disk.
2
Click the desired test from the test list.
3
Click the Set button.
4
Click “▼” to the right of R1 Bottle or R2 Bottle and select the desired bottle from the pull down list. Note that for the single-reagent test, you cannot select R2 Bottle .
5
Click “▼” to the right of R1 or R2 and select the desired position from the pull down list. Note that for the single-reagent test, you cannot select R2 position .
6
Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the settings.
NOTE: When you have set (not changed) the reagent position for a test, the analyzer will automatically take the reagent bottle volume as the volume of the remaining reagent. If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you about the wrong settings once you have clicked the Save button.
4-64
Advanced Operations
To clear the reage nt po sit ions set for a test 1
Click “▼” to the right of Rgt. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent disk from the pull down list.
2
Select the desired test from the test list.
3
Click the Clear button to clear the reagent positions set for the selected test.
NOTE: Once you have clicked the Clear button, the analyzer will immediately clear all the reagent positions set for the selected test without asking you to confirm the clearing. Ensure the right test is selected before clicking the Clear button.
To c hange reage nt parameters set for a test 1
Click “▼” to the right of Rgt. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent disk from the pull down list.
2
Select a test.
3
If the new positions for the selected test are on the current virtual reagent disk, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, click the Clear button and then select the other virtual reagent disk to the right of Rgt. Disk .
4
Click the Set button.
5
Select the bottle types to the right of R1 Bottle and R2 Bottle for the reagents. For the single reagent test, R2 Bottle is unavailable.
6
Select the positions to the right of R1 and R2 for the reagents. For the single reagent test, R2 is unavailable.
7
If you want to save the settings, click the Save button; otherwise, click the Cancel button.
NOTE: If some parameters are not set correctly, after you click the Save button, the system will remind you.
To set th e defa ult reage nt d isk 1
Click the Def. Rgt. Disk button to pop up the following dialog box.
2
Select a virtual reagent disk in the dialog box.
4-65
Advanced Operations 3
If you want to set the selected disk as the default reagent disk, click the OK button; otherwise, click the Cancel button. After you set the default reagent disk, the Reagent Disk tab and the Inventory tab will display its reagent information.
To exit the Reagent Parameters screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Reagent Parameters screen.
4.2.2.2 Invent or y tab Click the Inventory tab to check the remaining reagents and print the checking results, as Figure 4-24 shows.
Figure 4-24 Inventory tab
To ch eck remainin g reagents NOTE: Ensure you have opened the reagent bottles before checking the remaining reagents.
1
Click the Reagent Disk tab, and then click the “▼” to the right of Rgt. Disk and select the desired virtual reagent disk from the pull down list. Refer to 4.2.2.1 Reagent Disk tab for details.
4-66
Advanced Operations 2
To select one reagent, click the desired reagent; to select multiple discontinued reagents, press and hold CTRL and click the desired reagents one by one; to select multiple continue reagents, click the first reagent of the desired ones then press and hold SHIFT and click the last reagent of the desired ones.
3
Click the Check button to view how much reagent is left in the selected bottle and how many tests the remaining reagent is enough for.
To clear rea gent inf orm ation NOTE: The function is available only when an external reagent bar code scanner is used.
1
Select the reagent(s) whose information you want to clear from the reagent list.
2
Click the Delete button.
To pri nt out the remaining r eagents 1
Click the Print button to print the currently displayed reagent leftover information.
4.2.3 Calibration The Calibration screen is where you set the parameters regarding calibrators and calibrations and view the calibration results. To enter the Calibration screen, click Parameters → Calibration , or press CTRL + K.
NOTE: If you are not authorized to edit the calibration parameters, a dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the authorized user name and password.
4-67
Advanced Operations Figure 4-25 Calibration screen
At the Calibration screen, Figure 4-25, you can see the following tabs:
Calibrator
Rule
Result
4.2.3.1 Calibr ator tab The Calibrator tab is where you set parameters of the calibrators.
Figure 4-26 Calibrator tab
Click the Calibrator tab to display its contents, as Figure 4-26 shows. The tab consists of 4 zones:
4-68
Advanced Operations
Calibrators zone – displays such calibrator parameters as lot number, expiration date, etc.
Positions zone (Figure 4-27) – displays the positions of the calibrators.
As say s zone – displays tests that related to the selected calibrator in Calibrators zone.
Operating buttons – such buttons as Ad d, Edit , etc.
Figure 4-27 Calibrator positions
Five virtual sample disks (Sample Disk1 - Sample Disk5 ) are displayed in the Positions zone and every virtual disk has 6 calibrator positions ( S1 - S6). The 0 position (default) means this virtual disk has no position set for the calibrator yet. You cannot request a calibration run for a calibrator whose corresponding calibrator positions on all the five virtual disks are 0s.
To view posi tions and tests of a specific calibrator 1
Click the desired calibrator in the Calibrators zone and check its positions and tests in the Positions and As says zones respectively.
4-69
Advanced Operations
To add a new cali brator 1
Click the Ad d button and the Calibrator window will pop up.
2
The analyzer will automatically assign a number to the new calibrator and you can only view in the No. field without altering it; Enter calibrator name into the edit box to the right of Name; Enter the lot number into the edit box to the right of Lot No. ; Click “▼” to the right of Conc. Level and select Lo w, Normal or High from the pull down list as the concentration level of the calibrator; Click “▼” to the right of Exp. Date and select the appropriate as the expiration date of the calibrator.
NOTE: Ensure the right expiration date is set so that the analyzer can correctly judge whether the calibrator has expired. 3
Click the OK button to save the settings; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the settings.
NOTE: If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you about the wrong settings once you have click the OK button.
To change the settings of a specific calibrator 1
Select the desired calibrator from the Calibrators zone.
4-70
Advanced Operations 2
Click the Edit button and the Calibrator window will pop up.
3
The analyzer will automatically assign a number to the new calibrator and you can only view in the No. field without altering it; Enter calibrator name into the edit box to the right of Name; Enter the lot number into the edit box to the right of Lot No. ; Click “▼” to the right of Conc. Level and select Lo w, Normal or High from the pull down list as the concentration level of the calibrator; Click “▼” to the right of Exp. Date and select the appropriate as the expiration date of the calibrator.
4
Click the OK button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
NOTE: If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you about the wrong settings once you have clicked the Save button.
To delete a specif ic calib rator 1
Select the desired calibrator from the Calibrators zone.
4-71
Advanced Operations 2
Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the deletion.
3
Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to abort the deletion.
NOTE: Once you have confirmed the deletion, the analyzer will delete all the parameters, including calibrator positions, tests included, etc., related to the selected calibrator. Ensure the right calibrator is selected before confirming the deletion. You cannot delete a calibrator involved in calibrations that are in process or have been requested.
To set or change position
s of a specific calibrator
1
Select the desired calibrator from the Calibrators zone.
2
Click the Set Positi on button.
4-72
Advanced Operations 3
To select a position fromS1 - S6 or 0, click the desired position button; To select from other positions, click the Other button and select the desired position from the corresponding pull down list of the Other Position combo box. The calibrator positions that appear gray are occupied by other calibrators.
4
Click the Save Position button to save the changes.
To set o r delete ca librator concentration for 1
a specific test
Select the desired calibrator from the Calibrators zone.
4-73
Advanced Operations 2
Click the Concentration button and a Concentrations window will pop up.
As the figure above shows, the window mainly consists of 4 zones: (1) Calibrator zone – displays the calibrator and its lot number. You can click “▼” button to the right of Calibrator and select the desired calibrator from the pull down list or click calibrator is found.
or
until the desired
(2) As say s zone – lists all the available tests. The blue-framed tests are those whose standard concentrations have already been set. (3) Concentration zone – defines the standard concentration for the selected test. The standard concentration cannot be negative and if it appears -1, it indicates you have not set the standard concentration for the selected test yet. (4) Operating buttons zone – displays such buttons as Set, Delete, etc. 3
To set or change the standard concentration for a specific test, click the Set button. To delete the standard concentration of a specific test, click the Delete button.
4-74
Advanced Operations 4
Click the desired test in the As say s zone. The selected test will be marked a green tick and click it again to de-select it. You can choose multiple tests and set or delete their standard concentrations altogether.
5
To delete the standard concentration of the selected test or tests, go directly to the next step; To set standard concentration of the selected test or tests, enter the desired value into the edit box below Concentration .
6
Click the OK button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
7
If you do not need to set or delete standard concentration for another calibrator, go directly to the next step; To set or delete standard concentrations for another calibrator, click “▼” button to the right of Calibrator and select the desired calibrator from the pull down list or click or found. Then go back to steps 3.
8
until the desired calibrator is
Click the Close button to exit the Concentration window.
To exit t he Calib ration screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Calibration screen.
4.2.3.2 Rul e tab The Rule tab is where you set calibration parameters for the tests.
4-75
Advanced Operations Figure 4-28 Rule tab
Click the Rule tab to display its contents, as Figure 4-28 shows. The tab consists of 4 zones:
Operating buttons zones – lists such buttons as Save, Cancel , Clear , etc.
As say s zone – lists all the available tests. Those tests followed by forbidden mark, such as , have no reagent positions yet and you cannot set the calibration parameters for them. The blue-framed tests are those whose calibration parameters have already been set.
Rule zone – defines the nine parameters regarding calibration requests. Calibrators zone – lists the calibrators that have already been set. The selected calibrator will be preceded by a red tick; the expired calibrator will be preceded by a red block.
Parameter
What it does
How to set
Method
Defines the calibration rule.
Click “▼” to the right of Method and select from the pull down list.
The rules include One-point Linear (K-factor) , Linear (Two-point) , Linear (Multi-point) , Logistic 4P , Logistic 5P, Exponential 5P , Polynomial 5p , Parabola and Spline . One-point linear (K-factor) is the default.
4-76
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set
K Factor
Applies to One-point linear (K-factor) only.
Enter the desired value into the edit box.
When you set calibration parameters for a test: If the entered value is 0, a calibrator whose concentration is not 0 must be selected; If the entered value is not 0 and no calibrator is selected, the system will calculate the concentration of sample with the formula C=K*R (K is the K factor and R is the response of sample) without calibrating; If the entered value is not 0 and a calibrator whose concentration is 0 is selected, the system will calculate the concentration of sample with the formula C=K*(R-Rs1) (K is the K factor; R is the response of sample; R s1 is the response of the 0-concentration calibrator) after calibrating. Rerun Error Limit
Defines for how many times (1-5) the calibration test should be rerun. The default value is 1. If the entered value is 2, the analyzer will average of the two runs as the finaltake result; If the entered value is 3, the analyzer will first remove the one with the largest deviation and then take average of the remaining two runs as the final result;
Enter the desire integer(1-5) into the edit box to the right of Rerun Error Limit or click button on the right of the edit box until the desired value is reached.
If the entered value is 4 or 5, the analyzer will first remove the largest and the smallest results and take average of the remaining results as the final result. Difference
Defines the maximum difference between the largest response and the smallest response. Once the actual difference exceeds this value, the system will alert the user. The entered value should be no less than 0 and no greater than 2.5. The default value is 0, meaning you do not want to do this check.
4-77
Enter the desired value (0-2.5) into the edit box to the right of Difference .
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set
Interval
Defines the interval (0-99 days) between two adjacent auto calibrations. The default value is 0, indicating you do not need the analyzer to remind you of the next calibration.
Enter the desired integer (0-99) into the edit box to the right of
Blank Response
Defines the response upper limit (0-2.5) for the 0-concentration calibrator. The system will alert the user once the blank result exceeds this limit. The default value is 0, meaning you do not want to do this check.
Enter the desired value (0-2.5) into the second edit box to the right of Blank Response .
Sensitivity
Defines the maximum difference between the response of the largest-concentration calibrator and that of the smallest-concentration calibrator. The system will alert the user once the actual difference exceeds this limit.
Enter the desired value into the edit box to the right of Sensitivity .
Intervalor click on the right of the edit box until the desired value is reached.
The default value is 0, meaning you do not want to do this check. Difference Limit
Defines the difference between the calibration factors (slope of the calibration curve) of current and last calibrations ((Current-Last)/Last). It only applies to multi-point linear calibrations. The default value is 0, meaning you do not want to do this check.
Enter the desired value into the edit box to the right of Difference Limit .
Coefficient
Applies only to multi-point linear or non-linear calibrations. The valid value is 0-1. The default value is 0, meaning you do not want to do this check.
Enter the desired value into the edit box to the right of Coefficient .
SD
Applies only to non-linear calibrations. The fault value is 0, meaning you do not want to do this check.
Enter the desired value into the edit box to the right of SD.
To view the calibr ation paramete rs of a specif ic test 1
Select the desired calibration rule.
4-78
Advanced Operations 2
Select the desired test to view its calibration settings.
To set or change the calibrati on parame ters fo r a specific test 1
Select the desired calibration rule.
2
Click the Set button.
3
Click the test or tests. The selected tests will be followed by a green tick.
4
Set the request parameters as instructed above.
4-79
Advanced Operations 5
Select the calibrator or calibrators and the selected calibrator or calibrators will be preceded by a red tick. If selecting a nonlinear calibration rule in the step 1, you can select either several calibrators or only one calibrator whose concentration is not 0. If selecting a nonlinear calibration rule and only one calibrator, go to the next step to set parameters of auto dilution; otherwise, go to the step 9.
NOTE: You must determine the number of the calibrators to be used according to the selected calibration rule. You can only select calibrators whose standard concentrations have already been set.
6
Click the Au to Dil ut io n button and the Au to Dil ut io n Setu p window will pop up.
4-80
Advanced Operations 7
Enter concentrations in the ascending order into the edit boxes in the Au to Dil ut io n Setup window. You must determine the number of the edit boxes to be entered as you need. Leave the edit boxes that are not to be used empty. Conc. 1 must be 0. It refers to the concentration of the distilled water in position W of the sample disk. The entered second concentration must be greater than or equal to 0.6% of the concentration of the calibrator selected in the step 5. The entered penultimate concentration must be less than or equal to 37.5% of the concentration of the calibrator selected in the step 5. The entered last concentration must be the same with the concentration of the calibrator selected in the step 5. Following values are recommended where N is the number of concentrations and C is the concentration of the calibrator selected in the step 5. N=3
N=4
N=5
N=6
N=7
Conc. 1
0
0
0
0
0
Conc. 2
0.375*C
0.25*C
0.125*C
0.0625*C
0.03125*C
0.015625*C
Conc. 3
C
0.375*C
0.25*C
0.125*C
0.0625*C
0.03125*C
C
0.375*C
0.25*C
0.125*C
0.0625*C
C
0.375*C
0.25*C
0.125*C
C
0.375*C
0.25*C
C
0.375*C
Conc. 4 Conc. 5 Conc. 6 Conc. 7 Conc. 8
8
0
C
Click the Save button to save the settings; Click the Cancel button to ignore window.the settings. Then click
9
N=8
at the top-right corner to exit the
Click the Save button to save the changes; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
NOTE: If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you about the wrong settings once you have clicked the Save button.
To clear calibration settings 1
of a specific test
Select the desired calibration rule.
4-81
Advanced Operations 2
Select the test or tests whose calibration settings you want to clear.
3
Click the Clear button to clear the settings.
NOTE: Once you have clicked the Clear button, the analyzer will immediately clear all the calibration settings related to the selected test without asking you to confirm the clearing. Ensure the right test is selected before clicking the Clear button.
To exit t he Calib ration screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Calibration screen.
4.2.3.3 Result ta b The Result tab, as Figure 4-29 shows, is where you search for the calibration results and edit them.
Figure 4-29 Result tab
4-82
Advanced Operations
To view the calibration result 1
To specify the search conditions. Click “▼” to the right of As say, or click next test until the desired one is reached;
or
to select previous or
Click “▼” to the right of From (or To) and select the desired date to specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the calibration runs taking place during this specified period.
2
Click the Lock button to lock the selected search conditions.
3
Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be displayed in the Results zone.
NOTE: If no calibration run matches the specified conditions, a dialog box will pop up to remind you no match is found. Under this circumstance, go directly to step 6.
4
If you do not intend to check the calibration curve, go directly to step 6; Otherwise, click the Calib. Curve button to enter the Calibration
Curve
window to view the calibration result.
5 6
To print out the calibration curve, click the Print button. Click the Close button to close the Curve window. If you do not intend to check other calibration results, the operation is over; otherwise, click the Unlock button and return to step 1.
4-83
Advanced Operations
To re-ca lcu late the ca lib ration parameters usin g other metho ds 1
To specify the search conditions: Click “▼” to the right of As say , or click or next test until the desired one is reached;
or
to check previous
Click “▼” to the right of From (or To) and select the desired date to specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the calibration runs taking place during this specified period. 2
Click the Lock button to lock the selected search conditions.
3
Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be displayed in the Results zone. You can’t go on unless there are matches.
4
Select the desired calibrations (except for those whose Description displays Calib. Edit ) from the Calibrations field.
5
Click the Recalculate button.
6
Select the desired calibrator from the Results field.
7
Select the desired calibration rule from the pull down list to the left of Method .
8
Click the Calculate button to start the calculation; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to cancel the calculation.
To delete the calibrati on setti ngs 1
To specify the search conditions: Click “▼” to the right of As say , or click or next test until the desired one is reached;
or
to check previous
Click “▼” to the right of From (or To) and select the desired date to specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the calibration runs taking place during this specified period. 2
Click the Lock button to lock the selected search conditions.
3
Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be displayed in the Results zone. You can’t go on unless there are matches.
4-84
Advanced Operations 4
Select the desired calibrations from the Calibrations field.
NOTE: You cannot select the calibration whose Default displays Yes.
field
5
Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the deletion.
6
Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to cancel the deletion.
To define the default sett ing s 1
To specify the search conditions: Click “▼” to the right of As say , or click or next test until the desired one is reached;
or
to check previous
Click “▼” to the right of From (or To) and select the desired date to specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the calibration runs taking place during this specified period. 2
Click the Lock button to lock the selected search conditions.
3
Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be displayed in the Results area. You can’t go on unless there are matches.
4
Select the desired record from the Calibrations field.
4-85
Advanced Operations 5
Click the Default button to set the current calibration settings as the default settings of the selected test. The Default field of the calibration will display Yes.
NOTE: This analyzer uses the default calibration settings to calculate the sample concentrations. This analyzer will automatically set the latest settings (include the settings of calibration test, edit, calculation) as the default.
To vi ew the calibr ation d ata 1
To specify the search conditions: Click “▼” to the right of As say , or click or next test until the desired one is reached;
or
to check previous
Click “▼” to the right of From (or To) and select the desired date to specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the calibration runs taking place during this specified period. 2
Click the Lock button to lock the selected search conditions.
3
Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be displayed in the Results area. You can’t go on unless there are matches.
4
Select the desired record from the Calibrations field.
5
Click the Data button. The Test Data dialog box is displayed. You can view the data of selected calibration.
4-86
Advanced Operations 6
Select one result.
7
Click the Reaction Curve . A window will pop up to display the corresponding reaction curve.
8
Click the Close button to close the Reaction Curve window.
9
Click the Close button to close the Test Data window.
To exit t he Calib ration screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Calibration screen.
4.2.4 QC The QC screen is where you set the parameters regarding controls and QC runs and view QC results. To enter the QC screen, click Parameters → QC, or press CTRL + I.
4-87
Advanced Operations
NOTE: If you are not authorized to change the QC parameters, a dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the authorized user name and password.
Figure 4-30 QC screen
At the QC screen, Figure 4-30, you can see the following tabs:
Control – defines parameters regarding the controls.
Rule – defines parameters regarding the QC rule.
Setup – defines parameters regarding the QC test.
Real-time Resul t – displays information regarding real-time control.
Daily Result – displays information regarding daily control.
Day-to-day Result – displays information regarding day-to-day control.
4.2.4.1 Cont ro l tab The Control tab is where you set parameters for the controls.
4-88
Advanced Operations Figure 4-31 Control tab
Click the Control tab to display its contents, as Figure 4-31 shows. The tab mainly consists of 4 zones:
Controls zone – displays such control parameters as lot number, expiration date, etc.
Positions zone – displays the positions of the controls.
As say s zone – displays available tests that related to the selected control in
Controls zone. Operating buttons – such buttons as Ad d, Edit , etc.
Five virtual sample disks (Sample Disk1 - Sample Disk5 ) are displayed in the Positions zone and every virtual disk has 3 control positions (C1 - C3). The 0 position (default) means this virtual disk has no position set for the control yet. The Other means you can set other positions for the controls on the disk. You cannot request a QC run for a control whose corresponding control positions on all of the five virtual disks are 0s.
4-89
Advanced Operations
To view posit ions and tests of a specific cont 1
rol
Click the desired control in the Controls zone and check its positions and tests in the Positions and As say s zones respectively.
To add a new cont rol 1
Click the Ad d button and the Control window will pop up.
2
The analyzer will automatically assign a number to the new control and you can only view in the No. field without altering it; Enter control name into the edit box to the right of Name; Enter the lot number into the edit box to the right of Lot No .; Click “▼” to the right of Conc. Level and select Lo w, Normal or High from the pull down list as the concentration level of the control; Click “▼” to the right of Exp. Date and select the appropriate date as the expiration date of the control; Click “▼” to the right of Tube Type and select Large Tube or Small Tube for the control.
NOTE: Ensure the right expiration date is set so that the analyzer can correctly judge whether the control has expired.
4-90
Advanced Operations 3
Click the Save button to save the changes; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the change.
NOTE: If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you about the wrong settings once you have clicked the Save button.
To change the settings of
a specific cont rol
1
Select the desired control from the Controls zone.
2
Click the Edit button and the Control window will pop up.
3
The analyzer will automatically assign a number to the new control and you can only view in the No. field without altering it; Enter control name into the edit box to the right of Name; Enter the lot number into the edit box to the right of Lot No .; Click “▼” to the right of Conc. Level and select Lo w, Normal or High from the pull down list as the concentration level of the control; Click “▼” to the right of Exp. Date and select the appropriate date as the expiration date of the control; Click “▼” to the right of Tube Type and select Large Tube or Small Tube for the control.
4
Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes
NOTE: If any field is inappropriately set, the analyzer will warn you about the wrong settings once you have click the Save button.
4-91
Advanced Operations
To delete a specific co ntr ol 1
Select the desired control from the Controls zone.
2
Click the Delete button and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the deletion.
3
Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to abort the deletion.
NOTE: Once you have confirmed the deletion, the analyzer will delete all the parameters, including control positions, tests included, etc., related to the selected control. Ensure the right control is selected before confirming the deletion. You cannot delete a control involved in QC runs that are in process or have been requested.
To set or ch ange positi on of a spe cific control 1
Select the desired control from the Controls zone.
2
Click the Set Position button.
3
To select a position from C1 - C3 or 0, click the desired position button; To select other position, click the Other button and select the desired position from the corresponding pull down list of the combo box.
The control positions that appear gray are occupied by other controls. 4
Click the Save Position button to save the changes.
4-92
Advanced Operations
To set standard conc entration and SD for a specifi c test 1
Select the desired control from the Controls zone.
2
Click the Concentration button and a Concentration window will pop up.
ISE appears only when the ISE unit (optional) is connected. As the figure above shows, the window mainly consists of 4 zones: (1) Control zone – displays the control to be set. You can select the desired calibrator from the pull down list or click the desired calibrator is found.
or
until
(2) As says zone – lists all the available tests. The blue-framed tests are those whose standard concentrations have already been set. (3) Concentration and SD zone – defines the standard concentration and SD for the selected test. Neither the standard concentration nor the SD can be negative. When the Concentration or SD field displays -1, it indicates the standard concentration or SD has not been set yet. (4) Operating buttons zone – displays such buttons as Set, Delete, etc. 3
If you want to set concentrations and SDs for ISE tests, select the check box to the left of ISE. To set or change concentration or SD, click the Set button. To delete concentration or SD, click the Delete button.
4-93
Advanced Operations 4
If you enter concentrations and SDs for ISE tests, go directly to the next step. Click the desired test in the As say s zone. The selected test will be marked a green tick and click it again to de-select it. You can choose multiple tests and set or delete their standard concentrations or SD altogether.
5
To delete concentrations and SDs, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, enter the desired values into the edit boxes below Concentration (or Conc. ) and SD respectively.
6
Click the OK button to save the changes; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the change.
7
If you do not want to set or delete standard concentration or SD for another control, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, click “▼” button to the right of Control and select the desired control from the pull down list or click control is found. Then go back to step 3.
8
or
until the desired
Click the Close button to exit the Concentration window.
NOTE: Please use Mindray–recommended controls for ISE QC.
To exit th e QC scr een 1
Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.
4.2.4.2 Rul e tab The Rule tab is where you set QC rules for the tests.
4-94
Advanced Operations Figure 4-32 Rule tab
Click the Rule tab to display its contents, as Figure 4-32 shows. The tab consists of 3 zones:
Independent zone
Control-related zone
Operating buttons zone
The QC rules can be divided into two categories: independent rules, such as Cumulative Sum Check and Westgard Multi-rule , and control-related rules (not related to controls), such as Ac cu mu lat iv e Err or and X-R. Note that you cannot set the parameters of the control-related rules unless you have specified the controls to be used.
Figure 4-33 Independent zone
As Figure 4-33 shows, all the available tests are listed on the left and the rules, Cumulative Sum Check and Westgard Multi-rule , are listed on the right. The Cumulative Sum Check rule has three sub-rules and you can choose one of the sub-rules. The Westgard Multi-rule rule has six sub-rules and you can choose one or more sub-rules.
4-95
Advanced Operations Figure 4-34 Control-related zone
As Figure 4-34 shows, all the available tests are listed on the left and the QC rule parameters are listed in the Control , Ac cu mu lat ed Err or and X-R zones. Note that any test whose standard concentration and SD have not been set yet will be followed by a forbidden mark, such as
.
NOTE: If the ISE unit (optional) is connected, the ISE tests will be displayed in the test list.
To set the in dependent paramete rs 1
Tick the check box to the left of Independent .
2
Click the Set button.
3
Select the desired test or tests. The selected test will be followed by a green tick.
4-96
Advanced Operations 4
Click the option to the left of the desired sub-rule.
5
Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the settings.
6
Repeat from step 2 to set the parameters for other tests, or click the check box to the left of Independent again to de-select the field.
To set t he cont rol -relate d parameters 1
Tick the check box to the left of Control-related .
2
Click the Set button.
3
Select the desired test or tests. The selected test will be followed by a green tick.
4-97
Advanced Operations 4
To set the parameters: click “▼” button to the right of Control and select the desired control from the pull down list; enter the desired E (limit of the accumulated error) into the edit box to the right of Limit(E) ; enter the desired SDR value in the edit box to the right SDR (for the X-R rule).
5
Click the Save button to save the settings; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the settings.
6
Repeat from step 2 to set the parameters for other tests, or click the check box to the left of Control-related again to de-select the field.
To exit th e QC scr een 1
Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.
4.2.4.3 Setup tab The Setup tab is where you set QC parameters for the tests.
Figure 4-35 Setup tab
As Figure 4-35 shows, the Setup tab consists of four zones:
Assays zone – lists all the available tests.
4-98
Advanced Operations
Controls zone – lists all the available controls.
Au to QC zone – defines parameters regarding auto QC.
Operating buttons – lists such buttons as Save, Clear , etc.
The tests, whose QC parameters have already been set, are blue-framed. The tests whose reagent positions have not been set yet are followed by a forbidden mark, such as
, and you cannot set QC parameters for the test.
All the controls that have been set are listed in the Controls zone. The selected tests will be preceded by a red tick and the expired test will be preceded by a red mark. You can set the interval of the automatic QC runs by entering the desired number into the edit box below Count or clicking on the right of the edit box until the desired number is reached. To disable the auto QC function, enter 0 into the edit box.
To vi ew the QC settin gs of a sele cted test 1
Click the desired test.
To set o r c hange the QC pa rameters of a selected test 1
Click the Set button.
2
Select the desired test or tests. The selected parameter will be followed by a green tick.
4-99
Advanced Operations 3
Select the controls to be used.
4
Set the interval for the automatic QC runs.
5
Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
NOTE: If any parameter is inappropriately set, the analyzer will alert you after you have clicked the Save button.
To cl ear QC settings for a test 1
Select the desired test.
2
Click the Clear button to clear the settings.
NOTE: Once you have clicked the Clear button, the analyzer will immediately clear settings to the selected test without asking youthe to QC confirm the related clearing. Ensure the right test is selected before clicking the Clear button.
To exit th e QC scr een 1
Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.
4-100
Advanced Operations
4.2.4.4 Real-ti me Result tab The Real-tim e Result tab is where you view and print the real-time QC results and delete the real-time QC data.
Figure 4-36 Real-time Result tab
NOTE: If the ISE unit (optional) is connected, ISE tests will be displayed in the test list.
To view the results o f a real-time contr ol 1
Select the desired test from the As say s zone. The selected test will be followed by a green mark.
2
Tick the desired control or controls.
4-101
Advanced Operations 3
Click the Search button to display the information, including the results, QC graph, statistic data and QC status, of the last 10 control runs of the selected test using the selected control or controls. To print the displayed data and graph, click the Print button.
To print out the result of a contro 1
l run
Click the Print button to print out the result and QC graph after checking the result of a control run.
To delete data of a real-time cont
rol
1
Select the desired test in the As says field. The selected test will be marked with a green block to the right of it.
2
Select the desired control in the Controls field.
3
Click the Data button. The Delete QC Data dialog box is displayed. You can view and delete the measurement data of selected control.
4
Select one or more QC results you want to delete from the Delete QC Data dialog box.
4-102
Advanced Operations 5
Select Delete. The Enter User and Password dialog box pops up.
6
Enter correct user name and password and click OK. The selected results are deleted. Please note that the username you are entering should have the authority to set up quality control. Otherwise you cannot delete the QC results.
7
Click the Close button to exit the Delete QC Data window.
To exi t t he QC screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.
4.2.4.5 Daily Result tab The Daily Result tab is where you view and print the daily QC results and delete the daily QC data.
Figure 4-37 Daily Result tab
4-103
Advanced Operations
NOTE: If the ISE unit (optional) is connected, ISE tests will be displayed in the test list.
To view t he results of a daily cont
rol
1
Click “▼” to the right of Date and select the desired date from the pull down list to search the QC runs taking place within this date.
2
Click “▼” to the right of Rule and select the desired QC rule from the pull down list.
3
Select the desired test from the As say s zone. The selected test will be followed by a green mark.
4
Tick the desired control or controls.
5
Click the Search button to display the information, including the results, QC graph, statistic data and QC status, of the last 10 control runs of the selected test using the selected control or controls. To print the displayed data and graph, click the Print button.
To print out the result of a contro 1
l run
Click the Print button to print out the result and QC graph after checking the result of a control run.
4-104
Advanced Operations
To delete the data of a daily cont rol 1
Select the desired test in the As says field. The selected test will be marked with a green block to the right of it.
2
Select the desired control in the Controls field.
3
Click the Data button. The Delete QC Data dialog box is displayed. You can view and delete the measurement data of selected control.
4
Select one or more QC results you want to delete from the Delete QC Data dialog box.
5
Select Delete. The Enter User and Pa ssw ord dialog box pops up.
4-105
Advanced Operations 6
Enter correct user name and password and click OK. The selected results are deleted. Please note that the username you are entering should have the authority to set up quality control. Otherwise you cannot delete the QC results.
7
Click the Close button to exit the Delete QC Data window.
To exi t t he QC screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.
4.2.4.6 Day-to-day Result tab The Day- to-day Result tab is where you view and print the day-to-day QC results.
Figure 4-38 Day-to-day Result tab
NOTE: If the ISE unit (optional) is connected, ISE tests will be displayed in the test list.
To view the results o f a day-to-day contr ol 1
Click “▼” to the right of From (or To) and select the desired date to specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the QC runs taking place during this specified period.
2
Click “▼” to the right of Rule and select the desired QC rule from the pull down list.
4-106
Advanced Operations 3
Select the desired test from the As say s zone. The selected test will be followed by a green mark.
4
Tick the desired control or controls.
5
Click the Search button to display the information, including the results, QC graph, statistic data and QC status, of the last 10 control runs of the selected test using the selected control or controls. To print the displayed data and graph, click the Print button.
To print out the result of a contro 1
l run
Click the Print buttonrun. to print out the result and QC graph after checking the result of a control
To vi ew the data of a day- to-day con tro l 1
Select the desired test in the As says field. The selected test will be marked with a green block to the right of it.
2
Select the desired control in the Controls field.
3
Click the Data button. The Delete QC Data dialog box is displayed. You can view the measurement data of selected control.
4-107
Advanced Operations
4
Click the Close button to delete fromexit the Delete QC Data dialog box. window.
To exi t t he QC screen 1
4.3
Click the Close button to exit the QC screen.
Data
4.3.1 Export Click Data → Export or press CTRL + F to enter the Data exported screen, as Figure 4-39 shows.
NOTE: This analyzer automatically backs up its settings and test results. Exporting data refers to saving some data to a file (.SHD file) temporarily so that the data can be transmitted or updated. It is not the same as backing up the database. Mindray recommends this exporting function not be used unless it is necessary.
4-108
Advanced Operations Figure 4-39 Data exported screen
As Figure 4-39 shows, the Data exported screen consists of the following fields:
As say
Calibration
QC
Sample
Others
As say s
Separator
The item in blue font listed in the As say , Calibration , QC and Sample fields is test-related and you can select test in the As says field for these items.
NOTE: If the data to be exported includes the data of last year, Mindray recommends the Start date be not before November 1. Otherwise, you may not get the complete data.
4-109
Advanced Operations
To select all t he items 1
Click the Al l button to select all the items.
To d e-select all the it ems 1
Click the Clear button to de-select all the items.
To export data 1
Select the items to be included in the exported data as instructed below. Tick the check box to the left of the desired item to include it. For the items in black font, they can be included into the exported data simply by ticking the corresponding check boxes. For the items in blue font, ticking their corresponding check boxes means they apply to all the available tests. If you only intend to apply them to certain tests, first specify the corresponding fields in the Ap plied to field and then select the desired tests from the As says field. See the examples below for details. Example1: Follow the steps below to select: a) calculated tests (Calculation of the As say field) and units (Units of the As say field) for all the tests; b) test parameters (Parameters of the As say field) for AST and AL P only. (1) Tick the check boxes to the left of Parameters , Calculation , and Units in the As say field respe ctively. (2) Tick the check box to the left of As say in the Applied to field. (3) Tick the check boxes to the left of AST and AL P in the As says field respectively.
4-110
Advanced Operations
Example2: Follow the steps below to select: a) calibration parameters (Results in the Calibration field) for all the tests; b) calibration results (Test Data in the Calibration ) for the tests analyzed on February 3, 2007 and February 4, 2007 only. (1) Tick the check boxes to the left of Results and Test Data in the Calibration field respectively. (2) Select February 3, 2007 from the pull down list to the left of the From in the Calibration field. (3) Select February 4, 2007 from the pull down list to the left of To in the Calibration field.
Example3: Follow the steps below to select the UR results of the samples: a) sample IDs are 1 - 10; b) analyzed on February 3, 2007 and February 4, 2007. (1) Tick the check boxes to the left of Results in the Sample field (2) Enter 1 and 10 into the edit boxes to the right of Sample No. respectively. (3) Select February 3, 2007 from the pull down list to the left of the From in
4-111
Advanced Operations the Sample field. (4) Select February 4, 2007 from the pull down list to the left of To in the Sample field. (5) Tick the check box to the left of Sample in the Ap plied to field. (6) Tick the check box to the left of UR in the As says field.
2
Click the Export button and a dialog box will pop up.
3
Select the desired directory and file and click the Save button to save the data. You may also click the Cancel button to cancel the exporting.
To exit the Export screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Export screen.
4.3.2 Import Click Data → Import or press CTRL + E to enter the Import Data screen, as Figure 4-40 shows. Note that you need a user name and password of the administrator authority to enter the screen.
4-112
Advanced Operations Figure 4-40 Import Data screen
NOTE: The imported data will overwrite the corresponding data in the analyzer’s database. Before importing data, ensure the corresponding data is exported to another file. You can only import data from .SHD files. Mindray recommends this importing function not be used unless necessary.
To im por t data 1
Click the File button and a dialog box will pop up.
2
Select the desired file and click the Open button to open the selected file.
4-113
Advanced Operations 3
Click the Import button to import the data into the database. A dialog box will pop up when then importing is done. Click the OK button to close the box.
To exit the Impor t Data screen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Import Data scr een.
4.3.3 Demographics Click Data →Demographics or press CTRL + A to enter the Demographics screen, as Figure 4-41 shows. You can set patient information and add manual samples at the screen.
Figure 4-41 Demographics screen
As Figure 4-41 shows, you can click
(to the first patient),
previous patient), (to the next patient) or select the desired patient.
(to the
(to the last patient) to
To view the inf orm ation of a patient 1
Select the date when the patient sample was requested from the pull down list to the right of Date. The current date is the default.
4-114
Advanced Operations 2
You can click , , or to select the desired patient, or you can enter the ID of the desired sample into the edit box to the right of Move To and click the Move To button to go to the desired sample.
To add a new manual sample 1
Select the date from the pull down list to the right of Date. The current date is the default.
2
Click the Ad d button to add a new manual sample whose No. (greater
3
than 9000) is generated by the system automatically. Enter the patient information of the sample. The Date and the Sample No. cannot be changed. The Sample ID can be entered manually or by the bar code reader.
4
If you want to save the new manual sample, click the Save button; otherwise, click the Cancel button.
To edit the patient information 1 2
Select the date when the patient sample was requested from the pull down list to the right of Date. The current date is the default. You can click , , or to select the desired patient, or you can enter the ID of the desired sample into the edit box to the right of Move To and click the Move To button to go to the desired sample.
3
Click the Edit button.
4
Edit the patient information as needed. The Date and the Sample No. cannot be changed.
5
Click the Save button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
To define the default sett ing 1 2
Select the date from the pull down list to the right of Date. The current date is the default. Click the buttons , , , , or after entering the sample ID to the right of Move To, click the Move To, to select a sample.
3
Click the Edit button.
4
Click the Set as Default button to set the Sample Type (sample type), Sender (doctor who sends the sample), Sent by (department from which the sample is sent), Tester (doctor who analyzes the sample) and Tested by (the laboratory to analyze the sample) as the default settings.
5
Click the Save or Cancel button.
4-115
Advanced Operations
NOTE: The default setting is only available at the current screen. If you click the Exit button to close the Demographics screen, the default setting disappears and you need to set it again when you enter the screen the next time.
To obtain the default setti ngs If you add a new manual sample, after you click the Ad d button, the Sample Type , Sender , Sent by , Tester and Tested by are set as the default. If you edit the patient information of a sample, you can insert a step between the step 3 and step 4 of “To edit the patient information”: click the Load Default button.
To exit t he Demogr aphics screen 1
Click the Exit button to exit the Demograhics screen.
4.3.4 Result Click Data Result or press Ctrl + R to enter the Results & Statistics Figure 4-42 shows. →
screen, as
Figure 4-42 Results & Statistics screen
At the Result & Statistics screen, you can see the following tabs: Results , Result Statistics and Test Statistics .
4-116
Advanced Operations
4.3.4.1 Results ta b The Results tab is where you can view, edit, revise and print the sample results and send them to LIS in batch mode.
Figure 4-43 Results tab
To vi ew sample results 1
Click “▼” to the right of From (or To) and select the desired date to specify the dates to be searched. The analyzer will search all the sample runs taking place during this specified period.
NOTE: In case of a year-to-year search, the start date must not be st earlier than November 1 of the previous year.
2
Specify other desired search conditions or go directly to the next step.
4-117
Advanced Operations 3
Click the Search button to start the search and the matches will be displayed.
NOTE: If no sample run matches the specified conditions, a dialog box will pop up to remind you no match is found.
4
Click the By Sample , and then select a sample to view its results.
Click the By Test to view the results of all sample runs.
4-118
Advanced Operations
To view reactio n cur ve 1
Search for the sample results. Refer to the previous section To view sample results for details.
2
Select a sample run. If you select By Sample , select a sample and then a run.
If you select By Test, select a sample run directly.
4-119
Advanced Operations
3
NOTE: You will see the Curve button except that you select LIS in the Option field.
Click the Reaction Curve button to check the reaction curve and data of the selected blank runs. There are two tabs at the Reaction Curve screen, the Reac. Curve tab and the Reac. Data tab. Click the former to check the curve and the latter to check the data. 4
If you do not want to check the results of other runs, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, click the Previous or Next button to check other runs (blanks, samples, controls, or calibrations); or click the Close button and repeat from step 2.
5
Click the Close button to close the Reaction Curve window.
To set printin g option s 1
Click the option button to the left of Print in the Option field.
2
Click the Print Setup button to enter the Printing Setup screen. Refer to 4.4.7 Prin t for details.
To print out patient reports 1
Search for the sample results. Refer to the previous section To view sample results for details.
2
Select By Sample .
4-120
Advanced Operations 3
Click the option button to the left of Print in the Option field.
4
Select the sample or samples you want to print. You can select them by clicking the Select button or ticking the check boxes directly.
NOTE: Click the Select button, and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the start number of the sample.
Enter the number as required and click the OK button, and another dialog box will pop up to ask you enter the end number of the sample.
Enter the number as required and click the OK button. The analyzer will select the two samples and those between them. If you want to de-select samples, click the Deselect button, and the system will de-select two samples and those between them.
5
Click the Print button to pop up the Print Preview screen. At the Print Preview screen, you may choose Pr. Series (series printing) for your impact printer; you may choose Pr. Current (printing current page) or Pr. Al l (printing all pages) for other types of printers.
6
When you finish printing, click the Close button to exit the Print Preview screen.
To pri nt out a patient report in a combi ned mode This function will help you print different sample results of the same patient in one report. 1
Search for the sample results. Refer to the previous section To view sample results for details.
2
Select By Sample .
4-121
Advanced Operations 3
Click the option button to the left of Print in the Option field.
4
Select the sample or samples (5 is the maximum) you want to print. You can select them by clicking the Select button or ticking the check boxes directly.
5
Click the Combined Print button to pop up the Print Preview screen.
6
If you have intended to print out all the results, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, click the Selected Assay button in the preview window to select the tests to be printed out. Then after clicking the OK button, click the Hide Assays button.
7
At the Print Preview screen, you may choose Pr. Series (series printing) for your impact printer; you may choose Pr. Current (printing current page) or Pr. Al l (printing all pages) for other types of printers.
8
When you finish printing, click the Close button to exit the Print Preview screen.
To prin t out test reports 1
Search for the sample results. Refer to the previous section To view sample results for details.
2
Select By Test.
3
Click the option button to the left of Print in the Option field.
4-122
Advanced Operations 4
Select the sample run or runs you want to print. You can select them by clicking the Select button or ticking the check boxes directly.
NOTE: Click the Select button, and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the start number of the run.
Enter the number as required and click the OK button, and another dialog box will pop up to ask you enter the end number of the run.
Enter the number as required and click the OK button. The analyzer will select the two runs and those between them. If you want to de-select runs, click the Deselect button, and the system will de-select two runs and those between them.
5
Click the Print button to pop up the Print Preview screen. At the Print Preview screen, you may choose Pr. Series (series printing) for your impact printer; you may choose Pr. Current (printing current page) or Pr. Al l (printing all pages) for other types of printers.
6
When you finish printing, click the Close button to exit the Print Preview screen.
To edit m anual results 1
Search for the sample results. Refer to the previous section To view sample results for details.
NOTE: The To (end date) must be in the current year. Otherwise, you cannot edit manual results.
2
Select By Sample .
4-123
Advanced Operations 3
Click the option button to the left of the middle Edit in the Option field.
4
Click the Edit button.
5
Select a sample or samples. If you select more than one sample, you will set the same manual results for them.
6
Edit manual results in the Edit results field.
7
If you want to save the setting, click the Save button; otherwise, click the Cancel button.
To edit s ample results NOTE: Sample results can only be edited by authorized personnel. If an unauthorized personnel wants to edit sample results, a dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter authorized user name and password.
1
Search for the sample results. Refer to the previous section To view sample results for details.
NOTE: The To (end date) must be in the current year. Otherwise, you cannot edit sample results.
2
Select By Sample .
3
Click the option button to the left of the right Edit in the Option field.
4-124
Advanced Operations 4
Select a sample.
5
Select a sample run.
6
Click the Edit button.
7
Enter new result to the right of Result .
8
If you want to save the setting, click the Save button; otherwise, click the Cancel button.
To corr ect sample results NOTE: Sample results can only be revised by authorized personnel. If an unauthorized personnel wants to revise sample results, a dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter authorized user name and password.
1
Search for the sample results. Refer to To view s ample results for details.
NOTE: The End (end date) must be in the current year. Otherwise, you cannot revise sample results.
2
Select By Test.
3
Click the option button to the left of Correct in the Option field.
4
Click the Correct button.
4-125
Advanced Operations 5
Select a sample run or runs. You can select them by clicking the Select button or ticking the check boxes directly. If you select more than one runs, you will set the same factors for them.
6
Enter factor a and b to the right of Factor a: and Factor b: . The system will revise the results of the selected runs according to the formula Y=aX+b (Y stands for the new result and X stands for the old result).
7
If you want to revise the results, click the Save button; otherwise, click the Cancel button.
To send sample resul ts to LIS in batch m ode 1
Search for the sample results. Refer to the previous section To view sample results for details.
NOTE: The To (end date) must be in the current year. Otherwise, you cannot send sample results to the LIS in batch mode.
2
Select By Sample .
3
Click the option button to the left of LIS in the Option field.
4
Select a sample or samples. You can select them by clicking the Select button or ticking the check boxes directly.
5
Click the Send button to send the results of the selected samples to the LIS. When the results are sent, a dialog box will pop up.
Click the Close button to exit the dialog box.
4-126
Advanced Operations
NOTE: There are two modes to send information to the LIS, the real-time mode and the batch mode. You can send information to the LIS in batch mode at any time only except that when you select the Real Time Send at the System Setup Host Communication screen and the system is testing.
To exit t he Results & Statis tic s scr een 1
Click the Close button to exit the Results & Statistics screen.
4.3.4.2 Result Statis ti cs tab The Result Statistics results.
tab is where you view the statistic information of sample
Figure 4-44 Result Statistics tab
As Figure 4-44 shows, the search conditions are listed on the upper left of the screen, such statistic data as SD and Mean on the lower left, expected range on the upper right and statistic graph on the middle right.
4-127
Advanced Operations
To view statistic inform ation of sample re sults 1
Specify the desired search conditions.
NOTE: To specify the age range of the patients, enter the lower limit of the range into the edit box to the right of Ag e Lo wer Li mit and the upper limit into the edit box to the right of Ag e Upper Limi t. If you enter 0s into both the boxes, it means there is no specific requirement on the ages.
2
Click the Search button and the analyzer will search for the matches and present a statistic graph of the results found.
To exit t he Results & Statis tic s scr een 1
Click the Close button to exit the Results & Statisti cs screen.
4.3.4.3 Test Statis ti cs tab The Test Statistics reagents.
tab is where you view the summary of the tests and the
4-128
Advanced Operations Figure 4-45 Test Statistics tab
To vi ew the reage nt status of a test 1
Click the Refresh button to refresh the displayed work list.
2
Click the desired test and the corresponding reagent status will be displayed on the right of the screen.
To exit t he Results & Statis tic s scr een 1
Click the Close button to exit the Results & Statisti cs screen.
4-129
Advanced Operations
4.4
System
4.4.1 Syst em Status Click System → System Status or press CTRL + P to enter the System Status screen, as Figure 4-46 shows.
4-130
Advanced Operations Figure 4-46 System Status screen
At the System Status screen, you can see two tabs:
Status
Others
4.4.1.1 Statu s tab Figure 4-47 Status tab
As Figure 4-47 shows, you can check the status of the major components of the analyzer.
4-131
Advanced Operations Note that the light intensity of the lamp is expressed in Photometer Lamp . The bar to the right of the Photometer Lamp represents the light intensity of the lamp in term of percentage, light intensity of a new lamp being 100%. When the light intensity is normal, the bar is green. When the light intensity is more than 50%, the bar is yellow. When the lamp is to be changed, the bar is red. If the system does not detect the light of the lamp, the bar is white. The Network displays if the system is connected to the LIS. Click the Close button to close the System Status screen.
4.4.1.2 Others ta b
Figure 4-48 Others tab
As Figure 4-48 shows, you can not only view the dark currents of various wavelengths, but also check the movement of the cuvette loader and wash the sample and reagent probes and mixing bar. The list shows the dark currents and backgrounds of the nine wavelengths and one reference wavelength. The dark current refers to the AD output of the wavelength when the lamp of the photometer is not switched on. The backgrounds refer to the AD outputs generated by the lights when there are no cuvettes in the optical paths.
To test th e dark cu rrent 1
When the analyzer is on standby, click the Test Dark Cur. button and the readings will be displayed on the screen.
4-132
Advanced Operations
To lo ad/unload cuvette segme nt to/from a sp ecific posi tion 1
When the analyzer is on standby, select the desired position and click the Load Cuv. button to load/unload the segment to/from the selected position.
To wash th e sample and reage nt pr obes and the mixi ng bar 1
When the analyzer is on standby, click the Enhanced Wash button and the analyzer will use acid and alkaline detergents to wash the sample and reagent probes and the mixing bar.
To exit the System Status s creen 1
Click the Close button to exit the System Status screen.
4.4.2 Setup The System Setup screen is where you set options regarding the routine settings, reruns, test units and LIS connection. To enter the System Setup screen, click System → Setup , or press Ctrl + F3. A dialog box shown as the figure below will pop up.
Click Cancel and a dialog box will then pop up to ask you to enter your user name and password. You must have the corresponding authority to enter the System Setup screen.
NOTE: Only authorized personnel can enter the System Setup screen.
At the System Setup screen, shown in Figure 4-49, you can see the following tabs:
Routine
Rerun Units
Host Communication
Follow the procedures given below to set them respectively.
4-133
Advanced Operations
4.4.2.1 Rout in e tab
Figure 4-49 Routine tab
As Figure 4-49 shows, there are several fields you can set at the Routine tab. Follow the instructions given below to do so. Field
What it does
How to set
Times of Auto Washing (Startup/Shutdow n)
Defines how many times the analyzer should wash the sample probe, reagent probe and the mixing bar during every startup or shutdown.
Enter the desired digit into the edit box to the right of it.
Al arm When Avai lable Reagent Not Enough For
Defines when the analyzer should alert you about insufficient reagents. Also referred to as the insufficient reagents alarm hereinafter.
Enter the desired digit (must be greater than 2) into the edit box to the right of it.
Al arm Volu me
Defines the alarm volume when the analyzer gives alarm for insufficient reagents. Six volume levels, increasing from
Drag the drag bar.
Au to QC
left to right, are available. Defines whether the analyzer should automatically insert QC tests among routine tests.
4-134
Click the check box to the left of Yes to tick this option and click it again to cancel the selection.
Advanced Operations Field
What it does
How to set
Tests A rranged
Select the sequence mode of the runs. Selecting by Samples means arranging runs by the sequence of samples; selecting by Assays means arranging runs by the sequence of tests.
Select an option button.
Manual Bar Code Scanner
If it is selected, you must enter the bar code information when requesting a sample.
Click the check box to tick this option and click it again to cancel the selection.
NOTE: Set a suitable value for the insufficient reagents alarm so that the analyzer can alert you about insufficient reagents in time.
When you have finished setting the desired fields, click the Save button to save the changes. A dialog box will then pop up to remind you the settings are saved, as Figure 4-50 shows. Click the OK button to close the dialog box.
Figure 4-50 A dialog to remind you the settings are saved
If you entered an improper value for any field, a dialog box will pop up to warn you about the wrong setting after you clicked the Save button, as Figure 4-51 shows. Seeing the dialog box, click OK button to close it and re-enter a proper value for the field in question (insufficient reagents alarms, in case of Figure 4-51) and then save the settings again.
Figure 4-51 A dialog box to warn you about wrong settings
When you have finished setting, you can click the Close button to exit the System Setup screen.
4-135
Advanced Operations
4.4.2.2 Rerun tab
Figure 4-52 Rerun tab
Click the Rerun tab to view the 9 available fields in it, as Figure 4-52 shows. Follow the instructions given below to set them. Field Rerun
What it does How to set Defines how the rerun is Click the option button to to be conducted, the left of Au to to select the automatically or manually. auto rerun; Click the option If automatically, the button to the left of Manual analyzer will judge to select the manual rerun. whether a rerun is necessary based on the Note that the rest 8 fields specified conditions (the are selectable only if you other 8 fields in this tab); if have selected Au to . manually, you should decide whether to rerun the test yourself and do it manually.
Beyond Uppe r Limit of Reference Range
Instructs the analyzer to re-dilute and then rerun the sample if the result of the previous run exceeds the upper limit of the expected range.
4-136
Click the check box to the right of Beyond Upper Limit of Reference Range to select it; re-click the check box to de-select it.
Advanced Operations Field
What it does
How to set
Beyond Uppe r Limit of Linearity Range
Instructs the analyzer to re-dilute and then rerun the sample if the result of the previous run exceeds the upper limit of the linear range specified by the instructions of the reagent.
Click the check box to the right of Beyond Upper Limit of Linearity Range to select it; re-click the check box to de-select it.
Beyond Range
Instructs the analyzer to re-dilute and then rerun
Click the check box to the right of Beyond Response
the sample if the result of the previous run is beyond the allowed response range.
Range to select it; re-click the check box to de-select it.
Substrate out (Kinetic and Fixed Time)
Instructs the analyzer to re-dilute and then rerun the sample if the substrate ran out during the previous sample run. It only applies to the runs employing Kinetic or Fixed Time methods.
Click the check box to the right of Substrate out Kinetic and Fixed Time) to select it; re-click the check box to de-select it.
Surplus Antigen
Instructs the analyzer to re-dilute and then rerun the sample if the surplus antigen was found during the previous sample run.
Click the check box to the right of Surplus Antigen to select it; re-click the check box to de-select it.
No Balance Point (Endpoint)
Instructs the analyzer to re-dilute and then rerun the sample if no balance point was detected during the previous sample run. It only applies to the sample runs employing Endpoint method.
Click the check box to the right of No Balance Point (Endpoint) to select it; re-click the check box to de-select it.
Response
If no dilution parameters are set for a test, the sample run of it will not be rerun automatically even if no balance point is detected.
When you have finished setting the desired fields, click the Save button to save the changes. A dialog box will then pop up to remind you the settings are saved, as Figure 4-53 shows. Clicks OK button to close the dialog box.
4-137
Advanced Operations Figure 4-53 A dialog to remind you the settings are saved
If you entered an improper value for any filed, a dialog box will pop up to warn you about the wrong setting after you clicked the Save button. Seeing the dialog box, click OK to close it and then re-enter a proper value for the field in question and then save the settings again. When you have finished settings, you can click Close to exit the System Setup screen.
4.4.2.3 Uni ts tab
Figure 4-54 Units tab
Click the Units tab (Figure 4-54) to set the units that will be used for the tests. Note that all the units to be selected at other screens must be entered here. Follow the instructions given below to add, edit or delete test units.
To add a new test un it 1
Click the Ad d button.
4-138
Advanced Operations 2
Enter the desired unit into the edit box to the right of Units . In case of tests without units, enter blank (press the Space key) into the edit box.
3
Click the Save button to save the entered unit; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to discard the entered unit.
To edit an existing
test unit
1
Click “▼” to the right of Units to display the pull-down list and select the desired unit.
2
Click the Edit button.
3
Edit the unit in the edit box.
4
Click the Save button to save the changes; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the change.
To delete a n existi ng test u nit 1
Click “▼” to the right of Units to display the pull-down list and select the desired unit.
2
Click the Delete button to delete the selected unit.
NOTE: Once you click the Delete button, the software will immediately delete the unit without asking youthe to confirm deletion. Ensure the rightselected unit is selected before clicking Delete the button.
To exit the System Setup sc reen 1
Click the Close button to exit the System Setup screen.
4.4.2.4 Host Commu nic ation ta b The Host Communication network parameters.
tab is where you set the LIS connection mode and the
NOTE: If you have no LIS server, the function of the screen is unavailable.
4-139
Advanced Operations Figure 4-55 Host Communication tab
To set m ode and netwo rk parameters 1
In the Mode field, if you select Real-time Send , the system will automatically send sample results to the LIS server as soon as the tests of a sample are all finished; otherwise, you can only send sample results to the LIS server in batch mode at the Results & Statistics screen. Refer to 4.3.4.1 Results tab for details. If you select Real-time Download , the system will automatically download sample information from the LIS server when it is scanning bar code labels; otherwise, you can only download sample information from the LIS server manually.
2
For the same sample, if the information downloaded from the LIS server is different from the existing, selecting Neglect means the system will ignore the information downloaded repeatedly, selecting Overwrite means the system will overwrite the existing information with the new, and selecting Ad d means the system will add the newly-downloaded test information to the existing ones.
3
Enter the IP address of the server on the right of IP Address in the Host Computer field.
4
Enter the port on the right of Port in the Host Computer field.
5
Click the Save button to save the settings.
4-140
Advanced Operations
NOTE: There are two modes to send information to the LIS, the real-time mode and the batch mode. You can send information to the LIS in batch mode at any time only except that when you select the Real Time Send at the System Setup screen and the system is testing.
To connect/disconnect to the LIS NOTE: If the system is not connected to the LIS, the Test and the Connect buttons are available; otherwise, the Disconnect button is available.
1
If you do not want to check the connection between the system and the LIS, go directly to the next step; Otherwise, click the Test button to check the network connection. The system will pop up a dialog box to tell you whether the connection is successful.
2
If you want to connect the system to the LIS, click the Connect button; Otherwise, click the Disconnect button.
To exit the System Setup sc reen 1
Click the Close button to exit the System Setup screen.
4.4.3 Hospi tal The Hospital Information hospital and doctors.
screen is where you set the options regarding the
To enter the Hospital Information screen, click System → Hospital , or press CTRL + H. A dialog box will then pop up to ask you to enter your user name and password. You must have the administrator authority to enter the Hospital Information screen.
NOTE: You need the administrator Information screen.
authority
to
enter
the
Hospital
At the Hospital Information screen, shown in Figure 4-56, you can see three tabs:
Hospital
Doctors
Al l Do ct or s
4-141
Advanced Operations Follow the instructions given below to set them.
4.4.3.1 Hospi tal tab
Figure 4-56 Hospital Information screen (Hospital tab)
As Figure 4-56 shows, you can set hospital name and departments at this tab. The hospital name you set here will appear on the patients’ assay reports, and all the departments to be selected at other screens must be entered here.
To edit t he hospi tal name 1
Click the Edit button in the Name field.
2
Enter the desired hospital name into the edit box to the right of Name.
3
Click the Save button in the Name field to save the entered name.
To add a new department 1
Click the Ad d button in the Department field.
2
Enter the desired department name in the edit box to the right of Department .
3
Click the Save button in the Department field to save the entered name; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to discard the entered name.
To edit an exis tin g department name 1
Click “▼” to the right of Department to display the pull-down list and select the desired department.
2
Click the Edit button in the Department field.
3
Edit the selected department name in the edit box to the right of Department .
4-142
Advanced Operations 4
Click the Save button in the Department field to save the change; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the change.
To delete an existi ng d epartm ent name 1
Click “▼” to the right of Department to display the pull-down list and select the desired department.
2
Click the Delete button in the Department field to delete the selected department.
NOTE: Once you click the Delete button, the analyzer will immediately delete the selected department, as well as all the doctors (see the next section) belonging to this department without asking you to confirm the deletion. Ensure the right department is selected before clicking the Delete button.
To exit the Hospital Inform ation sc reen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Hospital Information screen.
4.4.3.2 Doct or s tab
Figure 4-57 Doctors tab
Click the Doctors tab to show the available fields, as Figure 4-57 shows. All the doctors to be selected at other screens must be entered here. There are four buttons at the middle part of the Doctors tab, as Figure 4-58 shows.
4-143
Advanced Operations Figure 4-58 Buttons at the middle of the Doctors tab
Button
Function Displays the information of the first doctor of the selected department. Displays the information of the previous doctor of the selected department. Displays the information of the next doctor of the selected department. Displays the information of the last doctor of the selected department.
If there is no existing doctor information in the selected department, the arrows will appear gray, indicating they are not usable at this moment. Follow the instructions given below to add, edit or delete doctors to a selected department.
To add a new doct or 1
Click “▼” to the right of Dept. to display the pull-down list and select the desired department.
2
Click the Ad d button and the analyzer will automatically assign a number to the new doctor. Note that you cannot change this number.
3
Enter the doctor’s name in the edit box to the right of Name.
4-144
Advanced Operations 4
Enter the doctor’ s duty into the edit box to the right of Duty .
5
Click the Save button to save the change; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the change.
To edit inform ation of an e xistin g doctor 1
Click “▼” to the right of Dept. to display the pull-down list and select the desired department.
2
Click the arrows to find the desired doctor information if necessary.
3
Click the Edit button.
4
Change the doctor’s name or duty as needed.
5
Click the Save button to save the change; Click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the change.
To delete the information of
an existing doctor
1
Click “▼” to the right of Dept. to display the pull-down list and select the desired department.
2
Click the arrows to find the desired doctor information if necessary.
3
Click the Delete button to delete the information of the selected doctor.
NOTE: Once you click the Delete button, the analyzer will immediately delete doctor from the selected department without asking you to confirm the deletion. Ensure the right doctor is selected before clicking the Delete button.
To exit the Hospital Inform ation sc reen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Hospital Information screen.
4-145
Advanced Operations
4.4.3.3 All Doctor s tab
Figure 4-59 All Doctors tab
Click the Al l Docto rs tab to view all the saved doctor information, as Figure 4-59 shows. To view the information of all the doctors, you can click “▼” to the right of Dept. and select Al l d epart ments . To view the information of doctors of a specific department, click “ ▼” to the right of Dept. and select the desired department. You can click the Close button to exit the Hospital Information screen.
4.4.4 User Click System → User or press CTRL + B and a dialog box will pop up, as Figure 4-60 shows, to ask you to enter the appropriate user name and password.
Figure 4-60 A dialog box to ask you enter the appropriate user name and password
Enter a user name and a password of the administrator authority to enter the User Management screen, as Figure 4-61 shows.
4-146
Advanced Operations
NOTE: Only users of the administrator authority can enter the User Management screen.
Figure 4-61 User Management screen
As Figure 4-61 shows, you can check the existing users or user groups at the User Management screen.
To add a new u ser 1
Click User Management → Ad d User to enter the Ad d User window.
2
Enter the necessary user information as instructed below. User : Enter the maximum 15 letters or digits into the edit box as the user
4-147
Advanced Operations name. Description : Enter additional information regarding the user’s duty, title or the like. Password : Enter the password to be used by the user. Confirm : Re-enter the password here to confirm the entry. Au th or it y: Assign the new user to an existing user group or groups. Click button to add the new user to all the existing user groups; click to remove the new user from all the existing groups; click button to add the new user to a selected group or groups; click remove the new user from a selected group or groups.
to
Department : Select the department the new user belongs to. Operator : Select the new user’s name from the pull down list.
3
Click the OK button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
To delete a user (e xcept f or admi nist rator) 1
Select the desired user from the User field.
2
Click User Management → Delete User and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to confirm the deletion.
3
Click the OK button to confirm the deletion; click the Cancel button to abort the deletion.
4-148
Advanced Operations
To edit th e user information
of a user (e xcept for administrator)
1
Select the desired user from the User Name field.
2
Click User Management → Edit User to enter the Edit User window.
3
Edit the user information as needed.
4
Click the OK button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
To change the user name and pa ssw ord of the adminis trator 1
Click User Management → Change Admin. Password and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the user name and password of the administrator authority.
4-149
Advanced Operations 2
Enter the user name and password as required and click the OK button and another dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the new user name and password.
3
Enter the new username and password as required.
4
Click the OK button to save the changes; click the Cancel button, for any reason, to ignore the changes.
To exit the User Management screen 1
Click on the upper right corner of the screen, or press ALT+ X, or click User Management →Close to exit the User Management screen.
4.4.5 Log Click System → Lo g or press CTRL + F2 to enter the Lo g Management screen, as Figure 4-62 shows.
4-150
Advanced Operations Figure 4-62 Log Management screen
As Figure 4-62 shows, the Lo g Management screen lists as many as 300 alarm messages. Once the saved alarm messages reach 300, the analyzer will automatically save the messages into a .log file and the file name is the saving time.
To check the curr ent log 1
Click Lo g→ Current to list the latest 300 (or less) alarm messages.
To check t he previously saved l og f ile 1
Click Lo g→ View to enter the View Log File window.
Look in:
2
File Name:
Open
Files of Type:
Cancel
Select the desired log file from the “Log” folder under the directory the BS-300 operating software is installed and click the Open button to open the selected log file.
4-151
Advanced Operations
To clear the curr ent log 1
Click Lo g→ Clear and a dialog box will pop up to ask you to save the current log to a .log file.
2
Click the OK button to save the log and then clear it; click the Cancel button to clear the log without saving it.
To exit the Lo g Manage ment s creen 1
Click Log→ Exit or
on the upper right corner of the screen to exit the
Log Management screen.
4.4.6 Maintenance Click System → Maintenance or press CTRL + Q and a dialog box will pop up, as Figure 4-63 shows, to ask whether you are maintenance personnel.
Figure 4-63 A dialog box to ask you whether you are maintenance personnel
Click the Cancel button and another dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter the appropriate username and password, as Figure 4-64 shows.
Figure 4-64 A dialog box to ask you to enter username and password
Enter a username and password of the administrator authority to enter the System Maintenance screen, as Figure 4-65 shows.
4-152
Advanced Operations Figure 4-65 System Maintenance screen
At the System Maintenance screen, the Sent Instructions field and the Received Data field respectively display the instruction codes sent to the Analyzing Unit and received by the Operation Unit.
NOTE: Do not perform any maintenance action unless you are certain the analyzer is on standby.
To start a maintenance operation 1
Click the desired tab.
2
Click the desired button.
To lo ck d ata 1
If you feel the codes displayed in the Sent Instructions and Received Data fields refresh too fast, click the Lock button, which then will become the Unlock button, and the displayed data will stop changing. You can click the Unlock button to resume the data refreshing.
To c lear d ata 1
Click the Clear button to clear the Sent Instructi ons and Received Data fields.
To exit the System Maintenance 1
screen
Click the Close button to exit the System Maintenance screen.
4-153
Advanced Operations
4.4.6.1 S. Pro be tab
Figure 4-66 S. Probe tab
Button
What it does
Ab ov e Inner Circ le
Click this button and the sample probe will move to a position above inner circle of the sample disk.
Into Inner Circle
Click this button and the sample probe will lower into the sample tube in the inner circle and stop when it contacts the liquid surface or the tube bottom.
Ab ov e Outer Cir cl e
Click this button and the sample probe will move to a position above the outer circle of the sample disk.
Into Outer Circle
Click this button and the sample probe will lower into the sample tube in the outer circle and stop when it contacts the liquid surface or the tube bottom.
Ab ov e Reacti on Dis k
Click this button and sample probe will move to a position above the dispensing hole of the reaction disk.
Into Cuvette
Click this button and the sample probe will lower into the reaction cuvette and stop when it contacts the liquid surface or the reaction cuvette bottom.
Ab ov e Wash Well
Click this button and the sample probe will move to a position above the wash well.
4-154
Advanced Operations
NOTE: Ensure the sample disk is placed in the home position or stopped at certain tube position before clicking Into Inner Circle or Into Outer Circle button. Otherwise, it may lead to probe collision. Ensure the reaction disk is placed in the home position or stopped at certain cuvette position before clicking Into Cuvette button. Otherwise, it may lead to probe collision.
4.4.6.2 R. Pro be tab
Figure 4-67 R. Probe tab
Button
What it does
Ab ov e Wash Well
Click this button and the reagent probe move to a position above the wash well.
Ab ov e Inner Circ le
Click this button and the reagent probe will move to a position above inner circle of the reagent disk.
Into Inner Circle
Click this button and the reagent probe will lower into the reagent tube in the inner circle and stop when it contacts the liquid surface or the tube bottom.
Ab ov e Outer Cir cl e
Click this button and the reagent probe will move to a position above the outer circle of the reagent disk.
4-155
Advanced Operations Button
What it does
Into Outer Circle
Click this button and the reagent probe will lower into the reagent tube in the outer circle and stop when it contacts the liquid surface or the tube bottom.
Ab ov e Reacti on Dis k
Click this button and reagent probe will move to a position above the dispensing hole of the reaction disk.
Into Cuvette
Click this button and the reagent probe will lower into the reaction cuvette and stop when it contacts the liquid surface or the reaction cuvette bottom.
NOTE: Ensure the reagent disk is placed in the home position or stopped at certain reagent position before clicking Into Inner Circle or Into Outer Circle button. Otherwise, it may lead to probe collision. Ensure the reaction disk is placed in the home position or stopped at certain cuvette position before clicking Into Cuvette button. Otherwise, it may lead to probe collision.
4.4.6.3 Mixi ng Bar tab
Figure 4-68 Mixing Bar tab
4-156
Advanced Operations Button
What it does
Ab ov e Wash Well
Click this button and the mixing bar will move to a position above the wash well.
Into Wash Well
Click this button and the mixing bar will lower into the wash well.
Ab ov e Reacti on Dis k
Click this button and the mixing bar will move to a position above the mixing hole of the reaction disk.
Into Cuvette
Click this button and the mixing bar will lower into the reaction cuvette.
Mix
Enter the desired integer into the edit box to the right of Time and click the Mix button to lower the mixing bar into the reaction cuvette and mix the specified time (expressed in terms of units and every unit stands for 20ms).
NOTE: Ensure the reaction disk is placed in the home position or stopped at certain cuvette position before clicking Into Cuvette or Mix button. Otherwise, it may lead to bar collision.
4.4.6.4 Reac. Dis k tab
Figure 4-69 Reac. Disk tab
4-157
Advanced Operations Button
What it does
Rotate Given Circles to Given Position
Enter the desired number into the edit box below Circles to specify how many circles the reaction disk should run. Enter the desired number (1-80) into the edit box below Position to specify at which cuvette position the reaction disk should stop. Click this button and the reaction disk will rotate the given circles and stop at the given position.
Rotate G iven Positio ns
Enter the desired number (1-80) into the edit box below Position to specify howrotate. many cuvette positions the reaction disk should Click this button and the reaction disk will rotate the given positions.
NOTE: Before operating the reaction disk, ensure the sample and reagent probes and mixing bar are away from it. Otherwise, the moving disk may bend the probes or bar.
4.4.6.5 Rgt. Dis k tab
Figure 4-70 Rgt. Disk tab
4-158
Advanced Operations Button
What it does
Rotate Given Given Position
Circles
to
Enter the desired number into the edit box below Circles to specify how many circles the reagent disk should run. Enter the desired number (1-50) into the edit box below Position to specify at which position the reagent disk should stop. Click this button and the reagent disk will rotate the given circles and stop at the given position.
Rotate G iven Positio ns
Enter the desired number (1-50) into the edit box below Positiondisk to should specify how many positions the reagent rotate. Click this button and the reagent disk will rotate the given positions.
NOTE: Before operating the reagent disk, ensure the reagent probe is away from it. Otherwise, the moving disk may bend the probes.
4.4.6.6 S. Dis k tab
Figure 4-71 S. Disk tab
4-159
Advanced Operations Button
What it does
Rotate Given Given Position
Circles
to
Enter the desired number into the edit box below Circles to specify how many circles the sample disk should run. Enter the desired number (1-60) into the edit box below Position to specify at which position the sample disk should stop. Click this button and the sample disk will rotate the given circles and stop at the given position.
Rotate G iven Positio ns
Enter the desired number (1-60) into the edit box below Positiondisktoshould specify how many positions the sample rotate. Click this button and the sample disk will rotate the given positions.
NOTE: Before operating the sample disk, ensure the sample probe is away from it. Otherwise, the moving disk may bend the probe.
4.4.6.7 Flui d Path tab
Figure 4-72 Fluid Path tab
4-160
Advanced Operations Button
What it does
Wash Sample Probe
Select Inner Surface, Outer Surface or Both Surfaces from the pull down list to the right of this button and click it to wash the exterior or interior of the sample probe.
Wash Reagent Probe
Select Inner Surface, Outer Surface or Both Surfaces from the pull down list to the right of this button and click it to wash the exterior or interior of the reagent probe.
Wash Mixing Bar
Click it to wash the exterior of the mixing bar.
S. Syringe Aspirate
Enter the desired number (3-45) into the edit box below Volume(S . Syri nge) . Click this button and the sample syringe aspirates the given volume (µl).
S. Syringe Dispense
Enter the desired number (3-45) into the edit box below Volume(S . Syri nge) . Click this button and the sample syringe dispenses the given volume (µl).
Reset S. S yri nge
Click this button and reset the sample syringe.
R. Syringe Aspirate
Enter the desired number (30-450) into the edit box below Volume(R . Syri nge) . Click this button and the reagent syringe aspirates the given volume (µl).
R. Syringe Dispense
Enter the desired number (30-450) into the edit box below Volume(R . Syri nge) . Click this button and the reagent syringe dispenses the given volume (µl).
Reset R. Syring e
Click this button and reset the reagent syringe.
NOTE: When you have clicked the S. Syringe Dispense button, if there is no enough liquid inside the sample syringe, the plunger will stop at the home position. When you have clicked the R. Syringe Dispense button, if there is no enough liquid inside the reagent syringe, the plunger will stop at the home position.
4-161
Advanced Operations
4.4.6.8 Cuv. Com p. tab
Figure 4-73 Cuv. Comp. tab
Button
What it does
Push Cuvettes
Click the button and the trolley of the cuvette loader should move to the loading position to load a new cuvette segment.
4-162
Advanced Operations
4.4.6.9 Lam p tab
Figure 4-74 Lamp tab
Button
What it does
Lamp On
Click this button to turn on the lamp of the photometer.
Lamp Off
Click this button to turn off the lamp of the photometer.
NOTE: If nothing is to be run for a while and you have no intention to exit the control system, you can turn off the lamp to maximize its service life.
4-163
Advanced Operations
4.4.6.10 Aut ol oader tab
Figure 4-75 Autoloader tab
Button
What it does
Load
Select the desired segment position from the pull down list below Segment Position and click this button to load a cuvette segment to the given position in the reaction disk.
Start
Select the desired motions from the pull down list below Au to lo ader Motio n and click this button to start the manipulator.
Unload
Select the desired segment position from the pull down list below Segment Position and click this button to unload a cuvette segment from the given position in the reaction disk.
To Ver. Initial Pos iti on
Click this button to move the manipulator vertically to
To Hor. Initial Position
its initial point. Click this button to move the manipulator horizontally to its initial point.
4-164
Advanced Operations
4.4.6.11 Oth ers tab
Figure 4-76 Others tab
Button
What it does
Download Se ttings
If the communication between the analyzing unit and the operation unit is failed, you can download the settings to the analyzing unit by clicking this button. The operation unit will try to resume the communication with the analyzing unit.
Reset Mechanic al Parts
Click this button to reset all the mechanical parts of the analyzing unit.
4.4.7 Print The Printing Setup screen is where you set the parameters regarding printing reports. To enter the Printing Setup screen, click System → Print , or press CTRL + O.
4-165
Advanced Operations Figure 4-77 Printing Setup screen
At the Printing Setup screen, Figure 4-77, there are four tabs:
Patient Report – defines parameters regarding the format of the patient report.
Test Report – defines items to appear on the printed test report.
Others – defines printing order and printer.
Report Header – defines the report header.
4.4.7.1 Patient R epor t tab
Figure 4-78 Patient Report tab
4-166
Advanced Operations As Figure 4-78 shows, the items listed in the Required field are required to appear on the patient report; the items listed in the Optional field are selectable items and you can select any interested items to print on the patient report.
To set the items t o appea r on t he patient r eport 1
Tick the check boxes to the left of the desired items. Clicking the ticked check box again can cancel the selection.
2
Click the Save button and a dialog box will pop up to tell you settings are saved. Click the OK button to close the box.
To set nu mber of reports pri nted on each page (A4 ) 1
In the Number of Reports o n Each Page( A4) field select 2 or 1 to print 2 or 1 report on each page.
To exit th e Prin tin g Setup s creen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Printing Setup screen.
4.4.7.2 Test Repo rt tab
Figure 4-79 Test Report tab
4-167
Advanced Operations As Figure 4-79 shows, the items listed in the Required field are required to appear on the test report; the items listed in the Optional field are selectable items and you can select any interested items to print on the report.
To set the items t o appea r on t he test report 1
Tick the check boxes to the left of the desired items. Clicking the ticked check box again can cancel the selection.
2
Click the Save button and a dialog box will pop up to tell you settings are saved. Click the OK button to close the box.
To exit th e Prin tin g Setup s creen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Printing Setup screen.
4.4.7.3 Others ta b
Figure 4-80 Others tab
To set the pri nting order 1
Select the desired test.
4-168
Advanced Operations 2
Select the desired sequence number from the pull down list above Set Printing Order .
3
Click Set Printing Order .
To set the default pr int er 1
Select area. the desired printer from the pull down list in the Default Printer
2
Click the Default Printer button to set the selected printer as the default printer.
To enable a uto p rin t and edited result flag 1
Select the Print aft er Sample Run checkbox.
The system will automatically print reports of the sample runs whose results are within or beyond reference range. A “ !” symbol will be printed next to the sample ID of abnormal sample runs.
2
Select the Flag Edited Results patient report.
checkbox to flag the edited results on
To exit th e Prin tin g Setup s creen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Printing Setup screen.
4-169
Advanced Operations
4.4.7.4 Report Hea der tab
Figure 4-81 Report Header tab
NOTE: The format of the printout may not be exactly the same as that displayed in the print preview window.
To set the cont ent and font of t he report header 1
Enter the desired header into the edit box to the right of Header .
2
Select the desired font from the pull down list to the right of Font .
3
Click the Setup button and a dialog box will pop up to tell you the settings that have been saved. Click the OK button to close the box.
To exit th e Prin tin g Setup s creen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Printing Setup screen.
4-170
Advanced Operations
4.4.8 Temperature Click System → Temperature or press CTRL + T and a dialog box will pop up, as Figure 4-82 shows, to ask you whether you want to debug the temperature control unit or check the temperature curve.
Figure 4-82 A dialog box to ask you whether to debug or to view curves
Click the Cancel button and another dialog box will pop up to ask you to enter appropriate username and password, as Figure 4-83 shows.
CAUTION: Only service engineers are authorized to debug the temperature control unit.
Figure 4-83 A dialog box to ask you to enter username and password
Enter the administrator username and password as required to enter the Temperature Contro l screen, as Figure 4-84 shows.
4-171
Advanced Operations Figure 4-84 Temperature Control screen
As Figure 4-84 shows, you can see two tabs at the Temperature Control screen:
Preheating Temp. Curve tab - displays temperature curve of preheating the reagents.
Reaction Temp. Curve tab - displays the temperature curve of the reaction disk.
For every temperature curve, its x-axis represents the time and y-axis the temperature. The parameters are interpreted as follows. Parameter
What it does
Precision
Defines the precision of temperature.
display the
How to set Select one of the nine options (0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2 and 5) from the pull down list.
Range
Defines the display range of the y-axis of the temperature curve.
Enter the lower limit into the first edit box and the upper limit into the second.
To check th e current t emperature curve 1
Select the desired temperature precision in the right of Precision .
2
Enter the desired display range in the right of Range.
3
Click the Save button.
To check th e previous t emperature curve 1
Click the History button.
4-172
Advanced Operations 2
Click
or
button until the desired curve is reached.
NOTE: Click
to check the previous curve;
Click
to check the next curve.
3
Enter the desired display range in the right of Precision .
4
Enter the desired display range in the right of Range.
5
Click the Save button to check the curve.
6
When you have viewed the curve, click the History button to quit viewing the history curve.
To lo ck a cur ve 1
Click the Lock button to lock the currently displayed curve.
To unl ock a cur ve 1
Click the Unlock button to unlock the currently locked curve.
To exit the Temperature Contro l s creen 1
Click the Close button to exit the Temperature Control screen.
4.4.9 Database Click System → Database or press CTRL + L and a dialog box will pop up, as Figure 4-85 shows, to ask you to enter the appropriate user name and password.
Figure 4-85 A dialog box to ask you enter the user name and password
Enter the user name and password of the administrator authority to enter the Database Maint enance screen as Figure 4-86 shows.
4-173
Advanced Operations Figure 4-86 Database Maintenance screen
NOTE: You can only maintain the database when the analyzer is on standby. This analyzer automatically backs up data. You only need to maintain the database when the system alerts you that the database is damaged. Usually you do not need to delete the reaction curves. Deleting the curves (only curves, not the results) only when you find insufficient space left on the hard disk.
To repair and c ompr ess cur rent d atabase 1
When the analyzer warns you about database damage, click the Repair & Compress button to repair and compress current database.
To delete certain reactio n cu rve 1
Select the desired start date from the pull down list to the right of the From .
2
Select the desired end date from the pull down list to the right of the To.
3
Click the Delete Reaction Curve And Data the selected period.
To delete all the reaction 1
button to delete the curve of
curv es
Click the Delete All Reaction Curve And Data curves.
4-174
button to delete all the
Advanced Operations
To exit the Database Maintenance screen 1
Click the Close button or the button at the upper right corner to exit the Database Maintenance screen.
4.4.10 Bar Cod e Scanner NOTE: If the system has no built-in bar code scanner (optional), the sub menu is gray and unavailable.
Click System Bar Code Scanner or press Ctrl+L and a dialog box shown as the figure below will pop up. →
Click the Cancel button and another dialog box shown as the figure below will pop up.
Enter authorized user name and password to enter the Bar Code Scanner screen.
4-175
Advanced Operations Figure 4-87 Bar Code Scanner screen
The screen displays the bar code symbols that can be read by the built-in scanner. You can select the ones that you need.
To set bar code symbo ls 1
Select a symbology.
2
If you want the system to check the bar code of the selected symbology after reading it, select the corresponding check box in the Check column.
NOTE: To prevent from misreading, Mindray recommends you to select the check box. 3
Enter the bar code length of the selected symbology into the corresponding edit box in the Symbol Length column. The length is between 3 and 16.
4
Repeat from step 1 to step 3 until all the symbologies you need are set.
5
Click the Save button and a dialog box will pop up to remind you that the setup is completed.
6
Click the OK button.
7
Click the button at the upper right corner of the Bar Code Scanner screen to exit the screen.
4.4.11 ISE Unit Click System
→
ISE Unit or press Ctrl+D to enter the ISE screen.
4-176
Advanced Operations Figure 4-88 ISE screen
There are several tabs at the screen. They are:
Calibration
Setup
ISE Unit
4.4.11.1 Calib rati on The Calibration tab displays the calibration results and limits of the ISE tests and you can calibrate them.
NOTE: An ISE calibration should be run in case of any of the following accidents: (1) More ISE tests are to be run after the system is powered on; (2) It has been eight hours since the last ISE calibration is run after the latest power-on; (3) More ISE tests are to be run after the daily cleaning procedure. But Mindray recommends running an ISE calibration after the daily cleaning procedure.
To calibrate ISE unit 1
Click the Calibrate button and the system will calibrate the ISE unit.
4-177
Advanced Operations
4.4.11.2 Setup The Setup tab is where you can set parameters for electrodes and tubing, set coefficients for results correction and view information of the reagent module.
Figure 4-89 Setup tab
Parameter
What it does
How to set
Al arm Li mit (Days)
The system will remind you to replace the electrode (or tubing) the days entered by you before the electrode (or tubing) should be replaced next time.
Enter a value into the edit box.
Al arm Li mit (Times)
The system will remind you to replace the electrode (or tubing) when the electrode (or tubing) is only enough for how many samples the number of which is entered by you.
Enter a value into the edit box.
(Electrode) Replaced on
Records the date when you replace the electrode. After replacing an electrode each time,
Tick the combo box and then select the date from the pulldown list box.
(Tube) Replaced on
remember to record the date. Records the date when you replace the tubing. After replacing tubing each time, remember to record the date.
Tick the combo box and then select the date from the pulldown list box.
Expiration Date
Expiration date of the reagent module.
4-178
-
Advanced Operations Parameter
What it does
How to set
Installation Date
Installation date of the reagent module.
-
Total Volume
Total volume module.
reagent
-
Inventory(%)
Ratio between the volume of remaining reagents and the total volume.
-
Lot No.
Lot No. of the reagent module.
-
Expired Mode
Expired mode module.
-
of
the
of
the
reagent
To set paramete rs f or electr odes, reage nts and t ubin g 1
Enter parameters for electrodes and tubing as you need.
2
Click the Save button.
To set coefficients for ISE results correction 1
Enter coefficients a, b for ISE tests as you need.
2
Click the Save button. The system will correct the results of the tests you have set according to the formula Y=aX+b (Y means new result and X means srcinal result).
NOTE: The system will save the new results only.
To exit th e ISE scr een 1
Click the Close button.
4-179
Advanced Operations
4.4.11.3 ISE Uni t The ISE Unit tab is where you can maintain the ISE unit.
Figure 4-90 ISE Unit tab
Parameter
What it does
How to set
Times
Defines the times the system runs A purge and B purge for after click the Purge AB button.
Enter a value into the edit box.
Button
What it does
Handshake
Click this button to send an instruction to make the ISE unit handshake with main unit.
Pump Calib.
Click this button to send an instruction to correct the pumps.
Maintenance
Click this button to send an instruction to maintain the ISE unit.
Bubble Calib.
Click this button to send an instruction to check bubbles.
Clean
Click this button to send an instruction to clean the ISE unit with ISE cleaning solution. Before cleaning, place the cleaning solution to the position 45 on the sample disk.
Purge A
Click this button to send an instruction to purge with Calibrant A.
4-180
Advanced Operations
4.5
Button
What it does
Purge B
Click this button to send an instruction to purge with Calibrant B.
Purge AB
Click this button to send an instruction to purge with Calibrant A and B alternately for given times.
Save Sent
Click this button to save the instructions displayed in the Sent instruction window to a .txt file in the directory where the executable file of the operating software locates.
Save Received
Click this button to save the instructions displayed in the Received instruction window to a .txt file in the directory where the executable file of the operating software locates.
Clear
Click this button to clear the displayed in the upper two windows.
ISE Reset
If there is something wrong with the ISE unit and ISE tests cannot proceed, click this button to reset the ISE unit.
Help
4.5.1 Version Click Help→ Version or press CTRL + S to enter the Software version screen.
Click the Close button to exit the Software Version screen.
4.5.2 Guide Click Help→ Guide or press CTRL + F11 to view the on-line help document.
4-181
5 Maintenance To ensure reliability, good performance and long service life of the system, regular maintenance is required. Be sure to follow the instructions given below to maintain the system. In case of problems beyond your ability or not covered in this chapter, be sure to call Mindray or your local distributor in time.
WARNING: Do not perform any maintenance procedures that are not described in this chapter. Do not touch the components other than the ones specified in this chapter. Performing unauthorized maintenance procedures can damage your system, void any applicable warranty or service contract and even cause personnel injuries. After performing any maintenance actions or procedures, ensure that the system runs normally. For some maintenance actions or procedures, be sure to place the POWER to OFF first. Do not spill water or detergent on the mechanical or electrical components of the system.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing.
To ensure maintenance is performed periodically, Mindray recommends the copy of the maintenance log in 5.7 Maintenance Log be used to keep the maintenance records.
5.1
Preparation The following things may facilitate your maintenance.
Tools
M1.5, M3 and/or M4 hex wrenches
Cross-headed screwdrivers (small, medium and large)
Syringe
A clean cup
Tweezers
Clean gauze
Clean cotton stick
5-1
Maintenance
Brush (to wash tanks)
Detergents
Acid: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid
Alkaline: 0.5% (V/V) javel water
WARNING: Poisonous gas will be produced if acid wash solution is mixed with alkaline wash solution. Do not mix the acid wash solution with the alkaline one.
CAUTION: Mindray has specified the following enhanced wash solutions: Acid wash solution: 0.1mol/l hydrochloric acid; Alkaline wash solution: 0.5%(V/V) javel water. Be sure to use the detergents recommendedenhanced wash solution specified by Mindray. Otherwise, proper result may not be obtained. Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline wash solutions be used alternately. For instance, if the acid wash solution is used at current startup, the alkaline one should be used at next startup.
Others
5.2
Ethanol Disinfector
Daily Main tenanc e
5.2.1 Checkin g Sampl e/Reagent Syri nges Follow the procedure given below to check the sample or reagent syringe. The purpose of this check is to ensure the syringe does not leak. 1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
5-2
Maintenance 2
Open the middle door of the analyzing unit and you will see both of the syringes, the sample syringe on the right and the reagent syringe on the left. T-piece
Plunger Guide Cap
3
Check whether the T-piece leaks. If not, proceed to the next step. If so, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.
4
Check whether the plunger guide cap leaks. If not, proceed to the next step. If so, replace the cap as instructed by 5.6.6 Replacing Plunger As sembl y o f Sampl e/Reagent Syr in ge .
5
Close the middle door.
5.2.2 Checkin g/Washin g Sample P ro be At every startup, the system will automatically wash the interior and exterior of the sample probe with deionized water. At every shutdown, the system will automatically wash the interior and exterior of the sample probe with the acid and alkaline detergents.
During is thecontinuous washing process, check whetherofthe from check the interior of the sample probe and in the direction theflow probe; the exterior of the sample probe to see whether the flow is continuous and normal. If the flow appears abnormal, wash the probe as instructed by 5.3.1 Washing Sample Probe . If the flow remains abnormal after washing, clean the probe as instructed by 5.6.1 Unclogging Sample Probe .
5-3
Maintenance If the flow remains abnormal after cleaning, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.
5.2.3 Checkin g/Washi ng Reagent Pro be At every startup, the system will automatically wash the interior and exterior of the reagent probe with deionized water. At every shutdown, the system will automatically wash the interior and exterior of the reagent probe with the acid and alkaline detergents. During the washing process, check whether the flow from the interior of the reagent probe is continuous and in the direction of the probe; check the exterior of the reagent probe to see whether the flow is continuous and normal. If the flow appears abnormal, wash the probe as instructed by 5.3.2 Washing Reagent Probe . If the flow remains abnormal after washing, clean the probe as instructed by 5.6.2 Unclogging Reagent Probe . If the flow remains abnormal after cleaning, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.
5.2.4 Checking/Washing Mixing Bar At every startup, the system will automatically wash the mixing bar with deionized water. At every shutdown, the system will automatically wash the mixing bar with the acid and alkaline detergents. During the washing process, check whether the bar rotates normally. If not, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.
5.2.5 Checking Detergents WARNING: Always wear gloves when checking the detergents.
1
Make sure the system is on standby status, and ensure no part of the system will motion.
2
Remove the cover from the reagent disk.
3
Check how much detergent left in the bottle on position 45. If there is not much left, add more detergent or install a new bottle of detergent.
4
Check how much detergent left in the bottle on position 47. If there is not much left, add more detergent or install a new bottle of detergent.
5
Replace the cover.
5-4
Maintenance Every wash consumes about 450µl detergent when the system uses detergent to clean the probes and the mixing bar.
5.2.6 Checking Connection of Deionized Water 1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will find the deionized water tank on the right.
Deionized Water Tank
Waste Tank
Used-Cuvettes Bucket
Extractable Plate
3
Check the connections between the two deionized water connectors (green and red) and their counterparts on the analyzer. Deionized Water Connector (Green)
Deionized Water Connector (Red) BNC Connector
Pickup Tube
If not, jump to step 5. If you see leaks, wipe off the water with clean gauze and proceed to the next step. 4
Check whether the connectors are loose. If not, proceed to the next step. If so, pinch the connector with fingers and screw it counter-clockwise to remove it and then screw it back on.
5
Check the connections between the pickup tubes and their connectors. If not, go directly to the next step. If you see leaks, wipe off the water with clean gauze and tighten the connections and proceed to the next step.
6
Pull out the extractable plate.
5-5
Maintenance 7
Check the connection between the pickup tube and the tank cap. If not, go directly to the next step. If you see leaks, wipe off the water with clean gauze and tighten the connection and proceed to the next step.
8
Push the extractable plate back in.
9
Close the lower door.
CAUTION: Make sure the deionized water pickup tubes are neither blocked nor bent.
NOTE: If leaking remains, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.
5.2.7 Checking Connection of Wastewater BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the following checks. Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will find the waste tank on the left.
5-6
Maintenance 3
Check the connections between waste connector and the waste tap of the analyzing unit. BNC Connector
Waste Connector
Pin Waste Tap Waste Tube
If no leaks, go directly to the next step. If you see leaks, wipe off the water with clean gauze and then press the pin on the tap and grab the tap and pull it off the connector. Keep pressing the pin and re-insert the connector back to the tap and proceed to the next step. 4
Check the connection between the waste tube and the tap. If no leaks, go directly to the next step. If you see leaks, wipe them off with clean gauze and tighten the waste tube and then proceed to the next step.
5
Pull out the extractable plate.
6
Check the connection between the waste tube and the tank cap. If no leaks, go directly to the next step. If you see leaks, wipe them off with clean gauze and tighten the connection and proceed to the next step.
7
Push the extractable plate back in.
8
Close the lower door.
CAUTION: Ensure the waste tube is neither blocked nor bent. A blocked or bent waste tube may lead to waste overflow that may damage the analyzing unit.
NOTE: If leaking remains, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.
5-7
Maintenance
5.2.8 Checkin g Remaini ng Deion ized Water CAUTION: The deionized water to be used on the BS-300 must meet the CAP Type II water requirements and the resistance rate must be no less than 0.5MΩ·cm.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the deionized water tank on the right.
3
Check how much deionized water left in the tank. If there is still enough left, jump to step 9. If not, proceed to the next step.
4 5
Pull out the extractable plate.
CAUTION: After removing the cap of the deionized water tank (together with the pickup tube and level sensor), place it on a clean table.
Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the tank cap and remove the cap together with the pickup tube and the level sensor. 6
Add deionized water to the tank.
7
Screw (clockwise) the cap together with the pickup tube and the level sensor back on to the tank until secure.
8
Push the extractable plate back in.
9
Close the lower door.
CAUTION: Ensure the deionized water pickup tube is neither blocked nor bent.
5.2.9 Emptying Waste Tank BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the below checks. Dispose of the wastewater in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer or distributor of the reagents for details.
5-8
Maintenance 1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the waste tank on the left.
3
Pull out the extractable plate.
4
BIOHAZARD: After removing the cap of the waste tank (together with the tube and level sensor), place it on an appropriate place to avoid biohazard contamination.
Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the tank cap and remove it together with the waste tube and the level sensor from the tank. 5
Take out the tank and empty it.
6
Replace the tank back into the cabinet.
7
Screw (clockwise) the cap (together with the waste tube and the level sensor) back onto the tank until secure.
8
Push the extractable plate back in.
9
Close the lower door.
CAUTION: Ensure the waste tube is neither blocked nor bent. A blocked or bent waste tube may lead to wastewater overflow that may damage the analyzer.
5.2.10 Emptying Used-Cuvettes Bucket BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the below checks. Dispose of the used cuvettes in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Open the lower door of middle. the analyzing unit and you will see the used-cuvettes bucket in the
3
Take out the bucket and empty it.
4
Replace the bucket back into the cabinet.
5
Close the lower door.
5-9
Maintenance
5.2.11 Cleanin g ISE Unit (opt io nal) BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the below checks. The cleaning solution is irritating to eyes and skin. Avoid contact with skin and eyes. In case of contact with eyes, rinse immediately with plenty of water and seek medical advice.
CAUTION: Use the consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables may degrade system performance. Add solution supplied in the cleaning solution kit to top of label on the powder bottle that is also supplied in the same kit and shake well to prepare the cleaning solution. The cleaning solution must be stored at 2-8°C and discarded two weeks after being prepared.
NOTE: The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit (optional) is connected. You should perform the maintenance once a day after all the samples analyzed. Besides, if the samples of a day requested for the ISE tests are 50 or more, you should perform the maintenance after 50 samples are analyzed. If you give the electrodes some time to stabilize after cleaning, you will experience slightly better performance.
1
Select System
2
Select the ISE Unit tab.
ISE Unit screen of the operating software.
3
Click the Clean button and a dialog box will pop up to remind you to put ISE cleaning solution to the position 45 on the sample disk.
4
Load about 200µl of ISE cleaning solution to the position 45 on the sample disk and click the OK button.
5
After cleaning, if there are samples requested for the ISE tests to be run, calibration should be run first. But Mindray recommends running an ISE calibration after cleaning.
5.2.12 Pump Calibration (optional) 1
Select System
2
Select the ISE Unit tab.
ISE Unit screen of the operating software.
3
Click the Pump Calib. button.
5-10
Maintenance
5.3
Weekly Main tenanc e
5.3.1 Wash in g Sample Pro be WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when washing the probe. Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Remove the cover from the sample disk. Shift the disk handle from horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and pull the disk upward to remove it.
3
Pull the sample probe arm to the highest point by hand. Rotate the probe arm to a position above the sample compartment and convenient to operate.
5-11
Maintenance 4
CAUTION: The tweezers may scratch the probe. Exercise caution when using it to wash the probe. Avoid direct contact between the tweezers and the probe. Do not use excessive force when washing the probe. Otherwise it may bend.
Pinch acid or alkaline detergent-soaked (ethanol-soaked also applicable) gauze with tweezers and gently clean the exterior of the sample probe until it is clean and smooth.
NOTE: Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline detergents be used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid detergent was used for last cleaning, the alkaline detergent would better be used for this time. 5
Pinch deionized water-soaked gauze to wash the sample probe.
6
After washing, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate the probe arm to move the probe to a position above the wash well.
CAUTION: After washing the probe, be sure to rotate the probe to a position above the wash well. 7
Keep the sample disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the sample disk all the way down. Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk to the rotor. To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel and gently pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured and you can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.
8
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON and the system will automatically reset the sample probe and wash it with deionized water.
5-12
Maintenance
5.3.2 Wash ing Reagent Pro be WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when washing the probe. Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Remove the cover from the reagent disk. Shift the disk handle from horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and pull the disk upward to remove it.
3
Pull the reagent probe arm to the highest point by hand. Rotate the probe arm to a position above the reagent compartment and convenient to operate.
5-13
Maintenance 4
CAUTION: The tweezers can scratch the probe. Exercise caution when using it to wash the probe. Avoid direct contact between the tweezers and the probe. Do not use excessive force when washing the probe. Otherwise it may bend.
Pinch acid or alkaline detergent-soaked (ethanol-soaked also applicable) gauze with tweezers and gently clean the exterior of the reagent probe until it is clean and smooth.
NOTE: Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline detergents be used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid detergent was used for last cleaning, the alkaline detergent would better be used for this time. 5
Pinch deionized water-soaked gauze to wash the reagent probe.
6
After washing, gently pull the probe arm to its highest point and rotate the probe arm to move the probe to a position above the wash well.
CAUTION: After washing the probe, be sure to rotate the probe to a position above the wash well. 7
Keep the reagent disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the reagent disk all the way down. Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk to the rotor. To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel and gently pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured and you can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.
8
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON and the system will automatically reset the reagent probe and wash it with deionized water.
5-14
Maintenance
5.3.3 Washing Mixing Bar BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when washing the probe. Dispose of the used gauze in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Pull the mixing bar arm to the highest point by hand. Rotate the bar arm to a position convenient to operate.
3
CAUTION: The tweezers can scratch the bar. Exercise caution when using the tweezers to wash the bar. Avoid direct contact between the tweezers and the bar. Do not use excessive force when washing the bar. Otherwise it may bend.
Pinch acid or alkaline detergent-soaked (ethanol-soaked also applicable) gauze with tweezers and gently clean the exterior of the mixing bar until it is clean and smooth.
NOTE: Mindray recommends the acid and alkaline detergents be used alternately for this purpose. For instance, if the acid detergent was used for last cleaning, the alkaline detergent would better be used for this time.
5-15
Maintenance
4
Pinch deionized water-soaked gauze to wash the mixing bar.
5
After washing, gently pull the bar arm to its highest point and rotate the bar arm to move the bar to a position above the wash well.
CAUTION: After washing the bar, be sure to rotate the bar to a position above the wash well.
6
Place the ANALYZING UNIT ON deionized and thewater. system will automatically reset the mixing barPOWER and washto it with
CAUTION: The mixing bar is precisely fabricated. Replace the scratched or bent bar once finding it. Refer to 5.6.5 Replacing Mixing Bar for details. .
5.3.4 Washing Deionized Water Tank CAUTION: The deionized water to be used on the analyzer must meet the CAP Type II water requirements and the resistance rate must be no less than 0.5MΩ·cm.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the deionized water tank on the right.
3
Pull out the extractable plate.
4
CAUTION: After removing the cap of the deionized water tank (together with the pickup tube and level sensor), place it on a clean table.
Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the cap (together with the deionized water pickup tube and the level sensor). 5
Take out the deionized water tank.
6
Wash the tank interior with deionized water. Use a clean brush to clean the interior if necessary.
7
Wash the pickup tube and the level sensor with deionized water. Use clean gauze to wash them if necessary.
8
Wipe water off the tank exterior, pickup tube and sensor cable with clean gauze.
5-16
Maintenance 9
Place the deionized water tank on the extractable plate.
10
Add deionized water into the tank.
11
Screw (clockwise) the cap (together with the pickup tube and level sensor) back onto the tank until secure.
12
Push the extractable plate back in.
13
Close the lower door.
CAUTION:
Ensure the deionized water pickup tube is neither blocked nor bent.
5.3.5 Washi ng Wast e Tank BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when washing the tank. Exercise caution and do not spill the waste onto other people or things. Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal and consult the manufacturer or distributor of the reagents for details. Dispose of used gauze in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Open the lower door of the analyzing unit and you will see the waste tank on the left.
3
Pull out the extractable plate.
4
BIOHAZARD: After removing the cap of the waste tank (together with the tube and level sensor), place it on an appropriate place to avoid biohazard contamination.
Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the cap (together with the waste tube and the 5
level sensor). Take out the waste tank.
6
Empty the waste tank.
7
Wash the tank interior with clean water. Soak the tank with disinfector if necessary.
8
Wash the waste tube and the level sensor with clean water.
5-17
Maintenance 9
Wipe water off the tank exterior, waste tube and sensor cable with clean gauze.
10
Place the deionized water tank back onto the extractable plate.
11
Screw (clockwise) the cap (together with the waste tube and level sensor) back onto the tank until secure.
12
Push the extractable plate back in.
13
Close the lower door.
CAUTION: Ensure the waste tube is neither blocked nor bent. A blocked or bent waste tube will lead to waste overflow that may damage the analyzing unit.
5.3.6 Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the samplegloves, disk/compartment. Dispose of used gauze in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Remove the cover from the sample disk. Shift the disk handle from horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and pull the disk upward to remove it.
3
Wash the disk with clean water and wipe it dry with clean gauze.
5-18
Maintenance 4
Use clean gauze (water or disinfector-dipped gauze if necessary) to clean the inside of the compartment.
5
If the bar code scanner(optional) is connected, use ethanol-dipped gauze to clean the window of the bar code scanner.
6
Keep the sample disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the sample disk all the way down. Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk to the rotor. To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel and gently pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured and you can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.
5.3.7 Clea ni ng Reagent Disk /Compar tment WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the reagent disk/compartment. Dispose of used gauze in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
5-19
Maintenance 2
Remove the cover from the reagent disk. Shift the disk handle from horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and pull the disk upward to remove it.
3
Wash the disk with clean water and wipe it dry with clean gauze.
4
Use clean gauze (water or disinfector-dipped gauze if necessary) to clean the inside of the compartment.
5
Keep the reagent disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the reagent disk all the way down. Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk to the rotor. To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel and gently pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured and you can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.
5.3.8 Clea ni ng Panel of Analyzin g Unit WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the panel of analyzing unit. Dispose of used gauze in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
5-20
Maintenance
5.4
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Wipe the panel of the analyzing unit with clean gauze (water or disinfector-dipped gauze if necessary).
Monthl y Maint enance
5.4.1 Cleaning Wash Well of Sampl e Probe WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the wash well. Dispose of used cotton sticks in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Pull the sample probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the arm away from the wash well.
3
Clean the inside of and the place around the wash well with cotton sticks.
4
Rotate the arm back to a position above the wash well.
5.4.2 Cleaning Wash Well of Reagent Pro be WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
5-21
Maintenance
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the wash well. Dispose of used cotton sticks in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Pull the reagent probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the arm away from the wash well.
3
Clean the inside of and the place around the wash well with cotton sticks.
4
Rotate the arm back to a position above the wash well.
5.4.3 Clea nin g Wash Well of Mix ing Bar WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the wash well. Dispose of used cotton sticks in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Pull the mixing bar arm to its highest point. Rotate the arm away from the wash well.
5-22
Maintenance 3
Clean the inside of and the place around the wash well with cotton sticks.
4
Rotate the arm back to a position above the wash well.
5.4.4 Clea ni ng Sample Prob e Rot or WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the rotor.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Wipe the rotor with clean gauze.
5.4.5 Clea ni ng Reagent Pro be Rotor WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
5-23
Maintenance
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the rotor.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Wipe the rotor with clean gauze.
5.4.6 Cleaning Mixing Bar Rotor WARNING: The tip hands is sharp can cause caution puncturewhen wounds. To prevent injuryprobe to your or and arms, exercise working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when cleaning the rotor.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Wipe the rotor with clean gauze.
5-24
Maintenance
5.5
Maint enance Every Six Months
Washing Dust Screens
5.6
1
Place the POWER to OFF.
2
Open the middle door.
3
Use a screwdriver to unscrew the screws fixing the dust screens on the middle door and remove the screens.
4
Use a screwdriver to unscrew the three screws fixing the back cover and open the back cover.
5
Use a screwdriver to unscrew the four screws fixing the screens on the back cover and remove the screens.
6
Wash the screens with clean water.
7
Wipe the screens dry with clean gauze.
8
Install the screens back to the back cover and the middle door with screws.
9
Close the middle door.
10
Close the back cover and fix it with three screws.
Irregu lar Main tenanc e
5.6.1 Unclogging Sample Probe When the sample probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow the steps given below to remove, unclog and install the sample probe.
5-25
Maintenance
5.6.1.1 Removi ng Sample Prob e WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when removing the probe.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Remove the cover from the sample disk. Shift the disk handle from the horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and pull the disk upward to remove it.
3
Pull the sample probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the probe to a position above the sample disk and convenient to operate.
5-26
Maintenance 4
Grab the lower part of the arm cover with two hands and pull them slightly outwards and remove the cover upward from the arm base.
5
Hold the probe’s fluid connector of probe with one hand and the tubing connector with the other. Rotate tubing connector counter-clockwise until it disconnects from the probe. Remove the tubing from the probe.
5-27
Maintenance 6
Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the probe’s circuit connector from the board with the other hand.
CAUTION: The probe arm is delicate. Exercise caution when disconnecting the connector. Excessive force may damage the connector and/or the circuit board. 7
Use a screwdriver to remove the retaining screw and take out the spring.
5-28
Maintenance 8
WARNING: Save the removed probe at a safe place where it will neither endanger people working around the area nor be damaged.
NOTE: Exercise caution when pulling the probe away from the arm so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage the probe arm.
Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so that the gasket inside the probe will not drop out and if it does drop out, save it at a clean place for later installation.
NOTE: The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon seeing. Refer to 5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe for details.
5.6.1.2 Unclog ging Sample Probe WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when unclogging the probe. Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Use a needle to unclog the probe from the tip.
CAUTION: The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon seeing. Refer to 5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe for details.
5-29
Maintenance
5.6.1.3 Instal li ng Sample Prob e WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when installing the probe.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Insert the probe back into the arm.
3
Replace the spring and screw the retaining screw back onto the probe.
4
Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the probe upward and then release the probe to see if it can move freely. If so, proceed to the next step; if not, check for errors and try again after removing the errors.
5
Connect the probe’s circuit connector back to the circuit board.
6
Ensure the gasket is inside the probe.
7
Screw the probe’s fluid connector back to the tubing connector.
CAUTION: Exercise caution when connecting the probe. Excessive force may bend the probe.
8
Add deionized water to a clean cup. Immerse the probe tip into the water by 2-3mm and the LED on the circuit board should be lighted. Take the probe tip out of water, and the LED should go out. If the test succeeds, proceed to the next step; if not, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.
5-30
Maintenance 9
Check the marks inside the probe arm cover to see the orientation of the cover. Install the cover back to the probe arm.
CAUTION: The marks inside the probe arm cover are shown in the figure below.
10
Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the probe upward and then release the probe to see if it can move freely. If so, proceed to the next step; if not, the cover is not properly installed. Remove the cover and re-install it and try this step again.
11
Pull the sample probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the probe to a position above the wash well.
CAUTION: After installing the sample probe, be sure to rotate the probe to a position above the wash well.
12
Keep the sample disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the sample disk all the way down. Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk to the rotor. To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel and gently pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured and you can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.
13
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON. The system will automatically reset the probe and wash it with deionized water.
5-31
Maintenance
CAUTION: The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon seeing.
5.6.2 Unclogging Reagent Probe When the reagent probe is clogged, the fluid flow will become abnormal. Follow the steps given below to remove, unclog and install the reagent probe.
WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when removing the probe.
5.6.2.1 Removi ng Reagent Prob e 1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Remove the cover from the reagent disk. Shift the disk handle from the horizontal position to vertical position. Grab the handle or handwheel and pull the disk upward to remove it.
5-32
Maintenance 3
Pull the reagent probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the probe to a position above the reagent disk and convenient to operate.
4
Grab the lower part of the arm cover with two hands and pull them slightly outwards and remove the cover upward from the arm base.
5
Hold the probe’s fluid connector with one hand and the tubing connector with the other. Rotate tubing connector counter-clockwise until it disconnects from the probe. Remove the tubing from the probe.
5-33
Maintenance 6
Press the circuit board with one hand and disconnect the probe’s circuit connector from the board with the other hand.
CAUTION: The probe arm is delicate. Exercise caution when disconnecting the connector. Excessive force may damage the connector and/or the circuit board.
7
8
Use a screwdriver to remove the retaining screw and take out the spring.
WARNING: Save the removed probe at a safe place where it will neither endanger people working around the area nor be damaged.
NOTE: Exercise caution when pulling the probe away from the arm so that the probe tip will not contact or even damage the probe arm.
Slowly pull the probe away from the probe arm. Exercise caution so that the gasket inside the probe will not drop out and if it does drop out, save it at a clean place for later installation.
5-34
Maintenance
NOTE: The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon seeing. Refer to 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe for details.
5.6.2.2 Uncl ogg in g Reagent Prob e WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when unclogging the probe. Dispose of the used needle in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Use a needle to unclog the probe from the tip.
NOTE: The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon seeing. Refer to 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe for details.
5.6.2.3 Instal li ng Reagent Pro be WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when installing the probe.
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Insert the probe back into the arm.
3
Replace the spring and screw the retaining screw back onto the probe.
5-35
Maintenance 4
Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the probe upward and then release the probe to see if it can move freely. If so, proceed to the next step. If not, check for errors and try again after removing the errors.
5
Connect the probe’s circuit connector back to the circuit board.
6
Ensure the gasket is inside the probe.
7
CAUTION: You must shape the tubing inside the reagent probe arm into a ring.
Exercise caution when connecting the probe. Excessive force may bend the probe.
Screw the probe’s fluid connector back to the tubing connector. 8
Add deionized water to a clean cup. Immerse the probe tip into the water by 2-3mm and the LED on the circuit board will be lighted. Take the probe tip out of water, and the LED will go out. If the test succeeds, proceed to the next step. If not, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.
5-36
Maintenance 9
Check the marks inside the probe arm cover to see the orientation of the cover. Install the cover back to the probe arm.
CAUTION: The marks inside the probe arm cover are shown in the figure below.
10
Pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm. Gently push the probe upward and then release the probe to see if it can move freely. If so, proceed to the next step. If not, the cover is not properly installed. Remove the cover and re-install it and try this step again.
11
Pull the reagent probe arm to its highest point. Rotate the probe to a position above the wash well.
CAUTION: After installing the reagent probe, be sure to rotate the probe to a position above the wash well.
12
Keep the reagent disk handle in the vertical position. Align the central hole of the handwheel to the rotor and lower the reagent disk all the way down. Rotate the disk a bit as necessary during the lowering process. When the disk is in place, shift the handle back to horizontal position to lock the disk to the rotor. To ensure the disk is secured, you may grab the handwheel and gently pull it upward. If the disk does not loose, it means it is secured and you can replace the cover; otherwise, re-install the disk.
13
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON. The system will automatically reset the probe and wash it with deionized water.
5-37
Maintenance
NOTE: The probe tip is precisely fabricated. A bent or damaged probe will lead to unreliable test results and should be replaced immediately upon seeing. Refer to 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe for details.
5.6.3 Repl acing Sampl e Pro be If the sample probe is bent or damaged, it must be replaced immediately. Follow the procedure given below to replace the damaged or bent sample probe.
WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when replacing the probe.
CAUTION: Please use consumables recommended by our company. Other consumables may degrade the system performance.
1
Remove the bent or damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.1.1 Removing Sample Prob e.
BIOHAZARD: Dispose of the bent or damaged sample probe in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
2
Install a new probe as instructed by 5.6.1.3 Installi ng Sample Probe .
CAUTION: After installing the sample probe, be sure to rotate the probe to a position above the wash well before installing the sample disk.
5.6.4 Replacin g Reagent Probe If the reagent probe is bent or damaged, it must be replaced immediately. Follow the procedure given below to replace the damaged or bent reagent probe.
5-38
Maintenance
WARNING: The probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when replacing the probe.
CAUTION: Please use consumables recommended by Mindray. consumables may degrade the system performance.
1
Other
Remove the bent or damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.2.1 Removing Reagent Probe .
BIOHAZARD: Dispose of the bent or damaged reagent probe in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
2
Install a new probe as instructed by 5.6.2.3 Installi ng Reagent Probe .
CAUTION: You must shape the tubing inside the reagent probe arm into a ring.
After installing the reagent probe, be sure to rotate the probe to a position above the wash well before installing the reagent disk.
5.6.5 Replacing Mixing Bar If the mixing bar is damaged, it must be replaced immediately. Follow the procedure given below to replace the damaged mixing bar.
5-39
Maintenance
WARNING: The sample probe tip is sharp and can cause puncture wounds. To prevent injury to your hands or arms, exercise caution when working around the probe. When replacing the bar, pinch the bar only by the knurled part and do not touch the other part of the bar. Protect the flat par of the mixing bar from scratches.
BIOHAZARD: Wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when replacing the mixing bar. Dispose of the damaged mixing bar in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
CAUTION: Please use consumables recommended by Mindray. consumables may degrade the system performance.
Other
1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Prepare a new mixing bar. Wash the flat part of the new bar with detergent-dipped gauze or cotton sticks and then wipe it dry with deionized water-dipped gauze.
3
Gently pull the bar to its highest point and rotate it to a position convenient to operate.
5-40
Maintenance 4
Pinch the bar by the knurled part with one hand and unscrew (counter-clockwise) the retaining nut with the other until the mixing bar looses. Pull the bar downward to remove it and remove the nut.
CAUTION: When trying to pull out the bar, concentrate your force in the direction of the axis on the bar arm. Biased force may damage the bar and/or the axis.
5
Align the mixing bar to the bigger hole of the retaining nut and gently screw it into the nut until the end of the bar is in line with the smaller hole of the nut.
6
Pinch the mixing bar by the knurled part and align the hole of the nut to the axis of the mixing bar and push the nut onto the bar until it reaches the end of the bar. Tighten the nut (screw clock-wise) with the other hand.
CAUTION: When trying to push the bar into the arm, concentrate your force in the direction of the axis on the bar arm. Biased force may damage the bar and/or the axis. Ensure the bar is all the way pushed to the end.
5-41
Maintenance 7
After replacing the bar, visually check whether the bar is vertical to the bar arm. If yes, proceed to the next step. If not, repeat step 5 to remove the bar and re-install it.
8
Pull the bar arm to its highest point and rotate it back to a position above its wash well.
CAUTION: After installing the mixing bar, be sure to rotate the mixing bar to a position above its wash well before turning on the analyzing unit.
9
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to ON. The system will automatically reset the bar and wash it with deionized water.
10
Follow the steps given below to do the position checks: Enter the System Maintenance screen and select the Mixing Bar tab as instructed by 4.4.6.3 Mixing Bar tab .
Click Into Wash Well and observe whether the mixing bar is aligned to the center of theorwash well. If not, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department the distributor. Set the Time to 100 and click Mix. The bar should start to rotate after enters the reaction cuvette. Observe whether the rotation is normal and pay attention to abnormal sound. If the rotation is not normal or the abnormal noise is heart, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.
5-42
Maintenance
5.6.6 Replacing Plunger Assembly of Sample/Reagent Syringe The plungers of sample and reagent syringes may be worn out after a certain period of service. A worn-out plunger may lead to leaks, which will consequently result in inaccurate aspiration and unreliable test results. You should check the syringes everyday and replace the old plunger assembly with a new one when
The old one has served for three months; or
The old one has been used for over 100,000 tests; or
The old one is apparently damaged.
CAUTION: Please use consumables recommended by Mindray. consumables may degrade the system performance.
Other
Exercise caution when installing the syringe. Excessive force may crack the syringe.
Follow the procedure given below to replace the plunger assembly of sample or reagent syringe. 1
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER to OFF.
2
Open the middle door and you will see both of the syringes, the sample syringe on the right and the reagent syringe on the left.
T-piece Syringe Connector Upper Retaining Screw Space Bar Syringe
Plunger Guide Cap Holder Plunger Button Lower Retaining Screw
5-43
Maintenance 3
Prepare a new plunger assembly (shown in the figure below) and soak the plunger tip in deionized water to eliminate bubbles.
+
Plunger Button
Plunger Rod
Plunger Tip
Plunger Guide Cap
4
Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the two upper retaining screws of the syringe and remove the screws and the space bar.
5
Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the lower retaining screw of the syringe and remove the syringe from the holder.
6
CAUTION: There may be residual water in the syringe. Exercise caution when removing it. Do not drop water onto the analyzing unit.
Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand and unscrew (counter-clockwise) the syringe. Exercise caution so that the gasket on the syringe does not drop out and if it does, store it in a clean place for later installation. Replace the gasket if it has been disassembled for 2 to 3 times. Otherwise leakage may occur or sampling precision be affected. 7
CAUTION: There may be residual water in the syringe. Exercise caution when pulling the plunger assembly out. Do not drop water onto the analyzing unit. The plunger rod of the sample syringe is slender. Exercise caution when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.
Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the plunger guide cap and pinch the plunger button to gently pull the plunger assembly from the syringe.
Syringe Connector
8
Syringe
Plunger Guide Plunger Rod Plunger Button Cap
CAUTION: The plunger rod of the sample syringe is slender. Exercise caution when working on it. Excessive force may bend it.
Pinch the new plunger assembly by the plunger button and carefully insert the plunger tip into the syringe and push it all the way to the end. Screw (clockwise) the plunger guide cap until secure.
5-44
Maintenance 9
Immerse the syringe connector into deionized water. Pinch the plunger button, pull it to aspirate half syringe of deionized water and then push it to expel the deionized water and the air from the syringe.
10
Grab the T-piece with one hand and the syringe connector with the other hand. Screw (clockwise) the syringe into the T-piece until secure.
11
Place the syringe on the holder.
12
Install the space bar and two upper retaining screws. Note that do not tighten the screws now.
13
Align the plunger button to the lower retaining screw of the plunger and screw (clockwise) the screw until secure.
14
Pinch the plunger guide cap to adjust the syringe. Our company recommends the upper edge of the space bar reach the fourth line (the 4µl line of the sample reagent, or the 40µl line of the reagent syringe) of the scale on the syringe.
15
Tighten the two upper retaining screws.
16
Place the ANALYZING UNIT POWER back to ON.
17
Enter the System Maintenance screen and set the Volume (SS. Syringe) or Volume (R. Syringe) to the maximum value(45 for the sample syringe and 450 for the reagent syringe ). Click S. Syringe Aspirate or R. Syringe As pirate and the syringe should start aspirating. After the syringe finishes the motion, click S. Syringe Dispense or R. Syringe Dispense and the syringe should start expelling. You may repeat this action several times. Refer to 4.4.6.7 Fluid Path tab for details. Pay attention to bubbles during the aspiration/dispensing process. Go to the next step if no bubble is found. If there are bubbles observed during the process, they may be caused by the air leak between the syringe and the T-piece. Uninstall the syringe and re-install it. If the bubbles are found again, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or the distributor.
18
Close the middle door.
5.6.7 Removing Ai r Bu bbles When you see air bubbles in the syringe, follow this procedure to remove them.
BIOHAZARD To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the maintenance. Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
1
Place the Power to OFF.
2
Loosen the screws on the syringe cover and remove the cover. You can see the two reagent syringes on the left and sample syringe on the right.
3
Loosen the four upper retaining screws of the syringe, then remove the screws and space bar.
5-45
Maintenance 4
Loosen the four lower retaining screws of the syringe and remove the syringe from the holder.
5
Pull the plunger gently outwards until you can not proceed any more, and then push it quickly. Repeat this pull-push operation until the air bubbles are removed from the syringe.
CAUTION: Be sure not to push the plunger to the end tip; otherwise the syringe may be damaged.
6
Place the syringe on the holder. Install the space bars and tighten the upper retaining screws.
NOTE:
th
The upper edge of the upper space bar must reach the 7 scale on the syringe. When fixing the retaining screws, be sure to tighten them alternately with equilibrium force. 7
Tighten counterclockwise the lower retaining screw until secure.
5.6.8 Repl acing L amp The lamp of the photometric system ages after a certain period of service. An aged lamp may introduce extra noise to the analyzing process. Replace the lamp with a new one when the system reminds you to do so, or the service time of the lamp has added up to 1,000 hours.
CAUTION: Please use consumables recommended by Mindray. consumables may degrade the system performance.
Other
NOTE: Do not touch either the light entrance of the lamp housing or the lens in front of the lamp. In case the entrance is dirty, clean it with ethanol-soaked defatted cotton.
1
Place the POWER to OFF. Wait at least 15 minutes for the lamp and its housing to cool down.
WARNING: After working for a while, the lamp and its housing are usually hot enough to burn you. Do not proceed with this procedure until they have cooled down.
5-46
Maintenance 2
Unscrew (counter-clockwise) the three retaining screws on the upper part of the back of the analyzing unit and open the upper part.
3
Unscrew the two lower screws on the back of the lamp housing and remove the radiator from the housing.
4
Pinch the lamp base with one hand and press the lever on the left of the base.
5
Pinch the new lamp by its base and insert the lamp pins into the mounting holes, the larger pin into the larger hole and the smaller pin into the smaller hole, on the base.
6
Replace the radiator and tighten the screws.
5-47
Maintenance 7
Close the upper part of the back of the analyzing unit and tighten the screws.
5.6.9 Replacing Electrode (optional) BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the below maintenance.
CAUTION: Use the consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables may degrade system performance.
NOTE: The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit (optional) is connected.
If you run no more than 100 samples requested for the ISE tests a day, replace the electrodes according to the following recommended schedule: Li+ Electrode
6 months
Na+ Electrode
6 months
+
K Electrode Electrode ClReference Electrode
6 months 6 months 6 months
If you run more than 100 samples requested for the ISE tests a day, replace the electrodes according to the following recommended schedule: Li+ Electrode +
3,000 samples
Na Electrode
10,000 samples
K+ Electrode
10,000 samples
-
Electrode Cl Reference Electrode
10,000 samples 10,000 samples
1
Place the POWER to OFF.
2
Open the ISE unit door.
3
Unscrew the screw of the ISE module manually.
5-48
Maintenance 4
Take the electrode(s) out from the housing by pressing down the compression plate(s).
NOTE: Because the electrodes must be installed sequentially, you have to take out the electrode to be replaced and those (or that) over it from above to below. For example, there is no other electrode over the Li electrode, so you just need to take it out; There are four electrodes over the reference electrode, so you have to take out all the five electrodes from above to below. ＋
5
Install the new electrode. Refer to the 2.4.1 Installing Electrodes details.
for
5.6.10 Repl acing Reagent Modu le (opti onal) BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the below maintenance. Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
CAUTION: Use consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables may the degrade system performance.
NOTE: The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit (optional) is connected.
1
Place the POWER to OFF.
2
Open the ISE unit door.
3
Take out the reagent module. Press the yellow button on the wand and take off the wand from the module. Then put the three red caps back to the module that were taken off when the module was installed.
4
Install a new reagent module. Refer to 2.4.2 Installing Reagent Module for details.
5-49
Maintenance
5.6.11 ISE Unit Storage (op ti onal) BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the below maintenance. Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national guidelines for biohazard waste disposal.
CAUTION: Use the consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables may degrade system performance.
NOTE: The maintenance is necessary to be performed when the ISE unit (optional) is connected. The ISE unit (optional) should be on power all the time. In some cases that the POWER will be shut down for a long time more than half an hour, the following steps should be performed.
1
Enter the ISE Maintenance screen of the operating software.
2
Click the Clean button and a dialog box pops up to remind you to place ISE cleaning solution to the position 45 on the sample disk.
3
Load about 200µl of the cleaning solution to the position 45 on the sample
4
disk. Click the OK button.
5
Click the Purge A button and after the instruction is executed, repeat this step for another two times.
6
Place the POWER to OFF.
7
Take out the reagent module. Press the yellow button on the wand and take off the wand from the module. Then put the three red caps back to the module that were taken off when the module was installed.
8
Place the POWER to ON.
9
Enter the System Maintenance screen of the operating software.
10
Click the Download Settings
11
Select System
12
Click the Maintenance button.
13
Place the POWER to OFF.
14
Take all the electrodes out from the housing from above to below by pressing down the compression plates.
15
Put the reference, Na and Cl electrodes into their individual sealed bags.
at the Others tab.
ISE Unit ISE Unit .
+
-
5-50
Maintenance 16
Aspirate a small volume of Calibrant A from the port of the reagent module + + with a syringe and inject it into the lumens of the K and Li electrodes until the lumens are full. Cover both ends of the lumens with tapes to prevent the Calibrant A flows from the lumens. +
+
Put the K and Li electrodes into their individual sealed bags. 17
Discard the reagent module.
5.6.12 ISE Unit Re-act iv atio n (op ti onal) BIOHAZARD: To prevent biohazard contamination, always wear gloves, goggles and protective clothing when doing the below maintenance.
CAUTION: Use the consumables recommended by Mindray. Other consumables may degrade system performance. After completing the following steps, ensure to calibrate the ISE tests before testing.
NOTE: Before reusing the ISE unit (optional) that has been stored, you must complete the following steps.
5.7
1
Take out all the electrodes from the sealed bags.
2
Remove the tapes from the K and Li electrode.
3
If necessary, soak the reference electrode in warm water until the lumen of the electrode has been cleared of salt build-up.
4
Install electrodes into the housing sequentially. Refer to the 2.4.1 Insta lling Electrodes for details.
5
Install a new reagent module to the ISE unit. Refer to 2.4.2 Installing Reagent Modu le for details.
+
+
Main tenanc e Lo g See the following tables for the parts to be maintained and the maintenance schedules. Please copy them every month and place a check mark in each day column for the maintenance items in the list after performing maintenance.
5-51
Maintenance Daily Maintenance
Month:——— Year:——— Maintenance Record
Daily Maintenance
1
1
Checking Sample Syringe
2
Checking Reagent Syringe
3
Checking/Washing Sample Probe
4
Checking/Washing Reagent Probe
5
Checking/Washing Mixing Bar
6
Checking Detergents
7 8
Checking Connection of Deionized Water Checking Connection of Wastewater
9
Checking Remaining Deionized Water
10
Emptying Waste Tank
11
Emptying Used-Cuvettes Bucket
12
Cleaning ISE Unit (optional)
13
Pump Calibration (optional) Weekly Maintenance
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3
Month:——— Year:———
Weekly Maintenance 1
Washing Sample Probe
2
Washing Reagent Probe
3
Washing Mixing Bar
4 5
Washing Deionized Water Tank Washing Waste Tank
6
Cleaning Sample Disk/Compartment
7
Cleaning Reagent Disk/Compartment
8
Cleaning Panel of Analyzing Unit
Maintenance Record 1
2
3
4
5
6
5-52
Maintenance Monthly Maintenance
Month:——— Year:——— Maintenance Record
Monthly Maintenance
1
1
Cleaning Wash Well of Sample Probe
2
Cleaning Wash Well of Reagent Probe
3
Cleaning Wash Well of Mixing Bar
4
Cleaning Sample Probe Rotor
5
Cleaning Reagent Probe Rotor
6
Cleaning Mixing Bar Rotor Maintenance Every Six Months
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 3
Month:——— Year:——— Maintenance Record
Maintenance Every Six Months 1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Washing Dust Screens Irregular Maintenance
Month:——— Year:———
Irregular Maintenance 1
Unclogging Sample Probe
2
Unclogging Reagent Probe
3
Replacing Sample Probe
4
Replacing Reagent Probe
5
Replacing Mixing Bar
6 7
Replacing Plunger Assembly Removing Air Bubbles
8
Replacing Lamp
9
Replacing Electrode (optional)
10
Replacing Reagent Module (optional)
11
ISE Unit Storage (optional)
12
ISE Unit Re-activation (optional)
Maintenance Record 1
2
3
4
5
6
5-53
6 Troubleshooting This chapter presents all error messages and recommended measures, which should be taken in time once any error occurs. If the recommended measures fail to solve the problems, contact Mindray or your local distributor. When an error occurs, its corresponding error message will be displayed on the lower left side of the screen, as Figure 6-1 shows. The log will record the time, level, code and message of every error (except for the level-11 error) to facilitate you to troubleshoot the analyzer. Refer to 4.4.5 Log for details about the log.
Figure 6-1 Error messages are displayed on the lower left side of the screen
6.1
Classifi cation of Error Messages The error messages are classified as various levels according to their severity.
6-1
Troubleshooting
Severity: Warning Level
Definiti on
Actions taken by the analyzer
0
Negligible errors
The analyzer will alert the operator without further treatment in most circumstances except that sometimes it will invalidate the test and even pause.
1
Errors to be flagged
The analyzer will flag the affected analysis so that the operator knows something went wrong during the analysis.
2
Errors to invalidate an analysis
The analyzer will invalidate the abnormal analysis and rerun the test.
20
Errors caused by unavailable samples
The analyzer will ignore the related analyses and proceed to other ones. When other analyses are finished, the analyzer will pause so that the operator can load the missing samples to the sample disk. Seeing this message, you can also press the button and load the missing samples before continuing the analysis.
3
Errors to reagents
invalidate
The analyzer will invalidate the analysis and rerun the test.
30
Errors caused by unavailable reagents
The analyzer will ignore the related analyses and proceed to other ones. When other analyses are finished, the analyzer will pause so that the operator can load the missing reagents to the sample disk. Seeing this message, you can also press the button and load the missing reagents before continuing the analysis.
31
Errors to invalidate all the analyses related to the reagent or sample associated with the instruction
/
Severity: Putting certa in uni ts on hold Level
Definiti on
Actions taken by the analyzer
4
Errors caused by the sample disk assembly and the sample dispenser
The analyzer will pause dispensing the samples. All the analyses whose samples have already been dispensed will be analyzed as programmed. The other analyses will be invalidated. When all the analyses are finished, the analyzer will pause.
6-2
Troubleshooting Level
Definiti on
Actions taken by the analyzer
5
Errors caused by the reagent disk assembly and the reagent dispenser
The analyzer will pause dispensing the reagents. All the analyses whose reagents (both the first and second reagents) have already been dispensed will be analyzed as programmed. The other analyses will be invalidated. When all the analyses are finished, the analyzer will pause.
6
Errors caused by cuvette loader only (reaction disk not
The analyzer will use all the remaining cuvettes and finish all the analyses on the reaction disk. When all the analyses are
affected) Errors affecting the sample disk and reagent disk only (reaction disk not affected)
finished, the analyzer will pause. The analyzer will put all the sample and reagent dispensing on hold. The analyses whose samples or reagents have been dispensed will be conducted as programmed and the other analyses will be invalidated. When the analyses are finished, the analyzer will pause.
Errors caused by unavailable deionized water or full wastetank
The analyzer will pause dispensing R1 right now. All the analyses whose R1 has already been dispensed will be analyzed as programmed. When the analyses whose R1 has already been dispensed have finished, the analyzer will pause so that operator can add deionized water or empty the waste tank.
7
13
Severit y: Stoppi ng th e analyzer Level
Definiti on
Actions taken by the analyzer
8
Errors caused by the reaction disk assembly
The analyzer will send the self-test instructions and place the mechanical parts in their home positions in the next period. If the analyzer can be reset within the period, the analyzer will proceed with the remaining analyses; otherwise, the analyzer will stop.
Severity: Emergency stop Level
Definiti on
Actions taken by the analyzer
9
/
The analyzer will not make any movement in the next period. The error status will be reserved. All the remaining analyses will be invalidated. You can operate the analyzer for other purposes such as printing and reviewing results.
Severity: Prohibiting analyses Level
Definiti on
Actions taken by the analyzer
10
/
The analyzer will prohibit any operation regarding analyses. But you can use the control system for such purposes as
6-3
Troubleshooting Level
Definiti on
12
/
Actions taken by the analyzer reviewing data. Only for the ISE unit (optional). The analyzer will prohibit ISE tests. But you can run other tests normally.
Severity: Prohibit ing startup Level
Definiti on
Actions taken by the analyzer
11
/
The control The system cannot be or is terminated. operation unitstarted (computer) exits the control system to the Windows operating system.
NOTE: All errors except for those of level 11 will be recorded in the log. When a level-11 error occurs, the operating system will display the error message and exit the operating software after the error is confirmed by the operator.
6.2
Corr ecti ve Measur es
6.2.1 Corrective Measures for General Errors In case of an error, enter the log to check the error code. Based on the error code, check the table below for recommended corrective measures.
WARNING: When troubleshooting the analyzer, first find out whether it is necessary to switch off the POWER or ANALYZING UNIT POWER. Wear gloves, goggles and lab coat if necessary.
6-4
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
100000001
Parity error.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100000002
Instruction too long.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100000003
Incomplete instruction.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100000004
Check sum error.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100000005
Downloading instructions.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100000006
Data at byte 00-0x7F exceed 0x7F.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960100
Wrong command. Illegal frame type.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960101
Wrong command. No this unit's command.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960102
Wrong command. Illegal command identity.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960103
Wrong command. Parameter significant bits wrong
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960104
Wrong command. Instruction length wrong.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960105
Wrong command. Sample position not within 1-60
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960106
Wrong command. Reagent position not within 1-50
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960107
Wrong command. Other parameter error.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960200
MUI self-test error.
10
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960300
MUI handshaking with sub-unit. Can't respond to other instructions.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960500
MUI calling sub-unit to reset and self-test. Can't respond to other instructions.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter. Can't
Level
respond
to
other
6-5
Correctiv e Measure
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
100960900
MUI work status not supporting this command. Self-test.
Level 9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960901
MUI work status not supporting this command. Failed.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor
100960902
MUI work status not supporting this Handshake.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960903
MUI work status not supporting this command. Reset.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributo
100960904
MUI work Shutdown.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
command.
status not supporting this command.
Correctiv e Measure
100960905
MUI work status not supporting this command. Free.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100960906
MUI work status not supporting this command. Mechanical reset.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100961000
MUI busy. Can't respond to current instruction.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100961100
Disassemble instruction wrong.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100961200
Attempted undefined system operation.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100961400
Attempted undefined inquiry.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100961500
Wrong parameter for inquiry.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100961600
Attempted to configure undefined parameter.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100961800
Attempted to configure undefined procedure.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100961900
Wrong parameter for procedure configuration.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100962000
E2PROM R/W wrong. Read error.
10
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100962001
E2PROM R/W wrong. Write error.
10
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-6
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
100962002
E2PROM R/W wrong. Check sum error.
Level 10
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100962003
E2PROM R/W wrong. Download error.
10
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100969000
Execution result not received within specified time.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
100969100
Command response wrong or no response
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280100
Wrong command. Illegal frame type.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280101
Wrong command. Not this unit's instruction.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280102
Wrong command. Illegal command identity.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280103
Wrong command. Instruction length wrong.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280104
Wrong command. Parameter significant bits wrong
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280105
Wrong command. Other parameter wrong.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280200
Control unit self-test wrong
10
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280300
Mechanical device reset wrong.
2
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280400
Control unit not supporting this command. Self-test.
2
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280401
Control unit not supporting this command. Malfunction.
4
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor
101280402
Control unit not supporting this command. Wait for handshake.
2
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280403
Control unit not supporting this command. Shutdown.
2
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280404
Control unit not supporting this command. Processing command.
2
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280405
Control unit not supporting this command. Free.
2
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-7
Correctiv e Measure
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101280406
Control unit not supporting this command. Mechanical reset.
Level 2
Correctiv e Measure Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101280500
Control unit busy. Can't respond to current instruction.
2
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributo
101280600
Attempted to configure un-defined speed.
101280700
Speed configuration unreasonable.
101280800 101280900
2
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Attempted to configure undefined parameter. Parameter value beyond limit or unreasonable.
0 0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101281000
Attempted undefined inquiry.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101281100
Inquiry parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101281200
Attempted undefined system instruction.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101281300
System instruction unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101281400
Attempted to commission undefined position.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101281500
Commissioning unreasonable.
101281600
System not commissioned consistent with instruction.
parameter
parameter
parameter
beyond
beyond
beyond or
limit
limit
or
or
limit
or
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
confirmation
not
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-8
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101281701
Tubing control failed. Rinse surface not detected during power-on.
Level 9
Correctiv e Measure Turn off the analyzing unit and then (1) Check the sample syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking Sample/Rea gent Syringes . (2) Check the sample probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe tip. If there are, contact our company or your local distributor. (3) Check the deionized water tank as instructed by 5.2.8 Checking Remaini ng Deionized Water . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101281800
Sample disk rotation failed. Can't reach initial point.
4
Ensure the sample disk rotates well as instructed by 4.4.6.6 S. Disk If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101281801
Sample disk rotation failed. Can't leave initial point.
4
Ensure the sample disk rotates well as instructed by 4.4.6.6 S. Disk If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101281802
101281803
Sample disk rotation failed. Can't detect weight disk signal.
4
Sample disk rotation failed. Sample probe left in Sample disk.
4
Ensure the sample disk rotates well as instructed by 4.4.6.6 S. Disk If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Turn off the analyzing unit and check if the sample tubes are placed high on the sample disk. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-9
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101281804
Sample disk rotation failed. Needle not at top point during rotation.
4
Syringe A/D error. Can't reach initial point.
4
101281902
Level
Correctiv e Measure Other errors have higher priority. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the sample syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7 Fluid Path tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101281903
Syringe A/D error. Can't leave initial point.
4
101282000
Sample probe rotation error. Can't reach initial point.
4
Check the sample syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7 Fluid Path tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. (1) Turn off the analyzing unit and clean the sample disk rotor. (2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101282001
Sample probe rotation error. Not at v-position for rotation.
4
(1) Turn off the analyzing unit and clean the sample disk rotor. (2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101282002
Sample probe v-move wrong. Can't reach initial (Sample disk/wash) point.
4
(1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the sample disk rotor. (2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-10
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101282100
Sample probe v-moved wrong. Can't leave initial (Sample disk/wash) point.
4
Sample probe v-moved wrong. Can't leave initial (Sample disk/wash) point.
4
101282102
Sample probe v-move wrong. Not at initial point (Sample disk/wash) for d-move start.
4
101282107
Sample probe v-move wrong. Collision.
101282108
Sample probe v-move wrong. Collide with transducer holder.
101282101
Level
Correctiv e Measure Check the sample probe as instructed by. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
31
Turn off the analyzing unit and clear the obstacles from the path vertical movement of the sample probe.
9
Turn off the analyzing unit and pinch the sample probe and push it to check whether the spring can move freely. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101282110
101282200
Sample probe v-move wrong. Current position prohibits v-move (Sample disk/wash).
4
Attempted undefined simple operation.
0
Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Other errors have higher priority. If thelocal error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your distributor.
101282300
Wrong cuvette position parameter in command.
2
Other errors have higher priority. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-11
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101282400
Illegal surface detection.
Level 31
Correctiv e Measure Turn off the analyzing unit. (1) Check whether the sample tubes are placed too hi gh on the disk. (2) Check the sample syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking Sample/Rea gent Syringes . (3) Check the sample probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe tip. If there are, contact our company or your local distributor. (4) Check whether the sample probe is bent or scratched. Replace the damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe necessary. (5) Clean the sample probe as instructed by 5.3.1 Washing Sample Probe . If this error occurs frequently, contact our company or your local distributor.
101282600
Syringe not initialized.
4
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101289000
No execution result received within specified time.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101289100
Command response wrong or no response.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101289200
Sending analyzed instructions failed.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440100
Wrong command. Illegal frame type.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440101
Wrong command. Not this unit's instruction.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440102
Wrong command. Illegal instruction identity.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440103
Wrong command. Instruction length wrong.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440104
Wrong command. Parameter significant bits wrong.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440105
Wrong command. Other parameter wrong.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-12
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101440200
Control unit self-test wrong.
Level
101440300 101440400
Correctiv e Measure
10
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Mechanical device reset wrong
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Control unit not supporting this command. Self-test.
3
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440401
Control unit not supporting this command. Malfunction.
5
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributo
101440402
Control unit not supporting this command. Wait for handshake.
3
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440403
Control unit not supporting this command. Shutdown.
3
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440404
Control unit not supporting this command. Processing instruction.
3
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440405
Control unit not supporting this command. Busy.
3
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440406
Control unit not supporting this command. Mechanical reset.
3
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440500
Control unit busy. Can't respond to current instruction.
3
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor
101440600
Attempted to configure undefined speed.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440700
Speed configuration unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440800
Attempted to configure undefined parameter.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101440900
Parameter configuration beyond limit or unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributo
101441000
Attempted undefined inquiry.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101441100
Inquiry parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101441200
Attempted undefined system instruction.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter
beyond
limit
or
6-13
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101441300
System instruction unreasonable.
Level
101441400
Attempted to commission undefined position.
101441500
Commissioning unreasonable.
parameter
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
or
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101441600
Not commissioned or confirmation not consistent with instruction.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101441701
Tubing control failed. Washing solution surface not detected.
9
Turn off the analyzing unit and
beyond
limit
limit
or
Correctiv e Measure
0
parameter
beyond
(1) Check whether the deionized water tank is empty and add more deionized water to the tank as necessary. (2) Check the sample syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking Sample/R eagent Syringes . (3) Check the sample probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe tip. If there are, contact our company or your local distributor. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101441800
Reagent disk rotation failed. Can't reach initial position.
5
Check the reagent disk as instructed by 4.4.6.5 Rgt. Disk tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101441801
Reagent disk rotation failed. Can't leave initial position.
5
Check the reagent disk as instructed by 4.4.6.5 Rgt. Disk tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-14
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101441802
Reagent disk rotation failed. Can't detect weight disk signal.
5
Reagent disk rotation failed. Reagent probe left in Reagent disk.
5
101441804
Reagent disk position for diskrotation rotation.failed. Needle not at highest
5
Other errors have higher priority. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101441900
The aspiration/dispensing volume is wrong. reagent volume exceeds the upper limit.
31
Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab. Check the reagent syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7 Fluid Path tab .
101441803
Level
The
Correctiv e Measure Check the reagent disk as instructed by 4.4.6.5 Rgt. Disk tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Turn off the analyzing unit and check the types of the reagent bottles. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. 101441902
Syringe A/D error. Can't reach initial position.
5
Check the reagent syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7 Fluid Path tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101441903
Syringe A/D error. Can't leave initial position.
5
Check the reagent syringe as instructed by 4.4.6.7 Fluid Path tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101442000
Reagent position. probe rotation error. Can't reach initial
5
(1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the sample disk rotor. (2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-15
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101442001
Reagent probe rotation error. Can't leave initial position.
Level 5
Correctiv e Measure (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the sample disk rotor. (2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101442002
Reagent probe rotation error. Not at v-position for h-rotation.
5
(1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the reagent disk rotor and. (2) Turn on analyzing by 4.4.6.2 R.the Prob e tab . unit and check the reagent probe as instructed If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101442100
101442101
101442102
101442107
Reagent probe v-move error. Can't reach initial (Reagent disk/wash) position.
5
Reagent probe v-move error. Can't leave initial (Reagent disk/wash) position.
5
Reagent probe v-move error. Not at v-initial (Reagent disk/wash) position.
5
Reagent probe v-move error. Collision.
Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
31
6-16
Turn off the analyzing unit and clear the obstacles in the path vertical movement of the reagent probe.
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101442108
Reagent probe v-move error. Collision transducer hold.
Level 9
Correctiv e Measure Turn off the analyzing unit and pinch the reagent probe and push it upw to see whether it can move freely. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101442110
101442200
Reagent probe v-move error. Current position prohibits v-move (Reagent disk/wash).
5
Attempted undefined simple operation.
0
Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Other errors have higher priority. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101442300
Wrong cuvette position parameter in command.
0
Other errors have higher priority. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-17
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101442400
Illegal surface detection.
Level 31
Correctiv e Measure Turn off the analyzing unit and (1) Check the types of the reagent bottles. (2) Check the reagent syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking Sample/Rea gent Syringes . (3) Check the sample probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe tip. If there are, contact our company or your local distributor. (4) Check whether the sample probe is bent or scratched. Replace the damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe necessary. (5) Clean the reagent probe as instructed by 5.3.2 Washing Reagent Probe . If this error occurs frequently, contact our company or your local distributor.
101442600
Syringe not position)
101449000
initialized
(unknown
syringe
current
5
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Execution result not received within specified time.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101449100
Command response wrong or no response.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101449200
Sending analyzed instructions failed.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600100
Wrong command. Illegal frame type
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600101
Wrong command. Not this unit's instruction
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600102
Wrong command. Illegal command identity.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600103
Wrong command. Instruction length wrong
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600104
Wrong command. Parameter significant bits wrong
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600105
Wrong command. Other parameter wrong
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-18
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101600200
Control unit self-test wrong
Level
101600300 101600400
Correctiv e Measure
10
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Mechanical device reset wrong
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Self-test.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600401
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Malfunction
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributo
101600402
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Wait for handshake.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600403
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Shutdown.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600404
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Processing instruction.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600405
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Free.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600406
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Mechanical reset.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600500
Control unit busy. Can't respond to current instruction.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributo
101600600
Attempted to configure undefined speed.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600700
Speed configuration unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600800
Attempted to configure undefined parameter.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101600900
Parameter value beyond limit or unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101601000
Attempted undefined inquiry.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101601100
Inquiry parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101601200
Attempted undefined system instruction.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
parameter
beyond
limit
or
6-19
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101601300
System instruction unreasonable.
Level
101601400
Attempted to commission undefined position.
101601500
Commissioning unreasonable.
101601600
System not commissioned consistent with instruction.
101601700
parameter
parameter
beyond
beyond
limit
or
Correctiv e Measure
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
limit
or
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
confirmation
not
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Mixing bar v-move error. Can't reach initial (wash) position.
7
(1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor.
or
(2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the mixing bar as instructed by 4.4.6.3 Mixing Bar tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101601701
Mixing bar v-move error. Can't leave initial (wash) position.
7
(1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor. (2) Turn on the analyzing unit and check the mixing bar as instructed by 4.4.6.3 Mixing Bar tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101601702
Mixing bar v-move error. Not at v-initial position (wash) for d-move.
7
(1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor. (2) Turn on the analy zing unit and che ck the mixing bar as instru 4.4.6.3 Mixing Bar tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-20
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101601707
Mixing bar v-move error. Current position prohibits v-move (wash).
Level 7
Correctiv e Measure Other errors have higher priorities. Check the mixing bar as instructed by 4.4.6.3 Mixing Bar tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101601800
Mixing bar h-move error. Can't reach initial position.
7
(1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor. (2) Turn on the analyzi ng unit and check the mixing bar as instruc 4.4.6.3 Mixing Bar tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101601802
Mixing bar h-move error. Not at h-initial position for h-rotation.
7
(1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor. (2) Turn on the analy zing unit and che ck the mixing bar as instru 4.4.6.3 Mixing Bar tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602000
Robotic arm v-move error. Can't reach initial (other) position
9
Turn on the analyzing unit. 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab .
Check the manipulator as instructed
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department o your local distributor. 101602001
Robotic arm v-move error. Can't leave initial (other) position.
9
Turn on the analyzing unit and check the manipulator as instructed 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-21
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101602100
Robotic arm h-move error. Can't reach initial position.
Level 6
Correctiv e Measure Turn on the analyzing unit and check the manipulator as instructed 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602101
Robotic arm h-move error. Can't leave initial position.
6
Turn on the analyzing unit and check the manipulator as instructed 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602200
Robotic arm hold error. Upper hand can't close when taking cuvette.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602201
Robotic arm hold error. Upper hand can't open when placing cuvette.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602202
Robotic arm hold error. Lower hand can't close when taking cuvette.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602203
Robotic arm hold error. Lower hand can't open when placing cuvette.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602204
Robotic arm hold error. Upper hand accidentally open during movement.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602205
Robotic arm hold error. Upper hand accidentally closed during movement.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602206
Robotic arm hold error. Lower hand accidentally opened during movement.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602207
Robotic arm hold error. Lower hand accidentally closed during movement.
6
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-22
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101602208
Robotic arm hold error. No cuvette in compartment.
Level 0
Correctiv e Measure Check the remaining cuvettes and add more cuvettes as needed. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101602209
Cuvette compartment not ready.
0
If there is no cuvette left in the cuvette compartment, add more cuvettes the compartment as instructed by 1.1.1.7 Reaction Cuvette Loader press the
button.
If there is cuvette in the compartment, ignore the message. If this error occurs frequently, contact our company or your l distributor. 101602210
Cuvette compartment trolley moving.
0
If there is no cuvette left in the cuvette compartment, add more cuvettes the compartment as instructed by 1.1.1.7 Reaction Cuvette Loader press the
button.
If there is cuvette in the compartment, ignore the message. If this error occurs frequently, contact our company or your l distributor. 101609000
Execution result not received within specified time.
5
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101609100
Command response wrong or no response.
5
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101609200 101760100
Sending analyzed instructions failed. Wrong command. Illegal frame type
9 31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760101
Wrong command. Not this Unit's instruction
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760102
Wrong command. Illegal command identity.
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-23
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101760103
Wrong command. Instruction length wrong
Level
101760104
Wrong command. Parameter significant bits wrong
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760105
Wrong command. Other parameter wrong
31
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760200
Control unit self-test wrong
10
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
31
Correctiv e Measure Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760400
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Self-test.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760401
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Malfunction
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributo
101760402
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Wait for handshake.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760403
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Shutdown.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760404
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Processing instruction.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760405
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Free.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760406
Control unit not supporting this instruction. Mechanical reset.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760500
Control unit busy. Can't respond to current instruction.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributo
101760600
Attempted undefined inquiry.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101760700
Attempted undefined temperature parameter inquiry.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101761100
Attempted undefined temperature inquiry.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101761200
Attempted target unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101761300
Attempted undefined system instruction.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
temperature
beyond
limit
or
6-24
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
101920900
Parameter configuration beyond limit or unreasonable.
Level 0
101921000
Attempted undefined inquiry.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101921100
Inquiry parameter beyond limit or unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101921200
Attempted undefined system instruction.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101921300
System instruction unreasonable.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101921400
Re-disk rotation error. Can't reach initial position.
parameter
beyond
limit
or
8
Correctiv e Measure Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributo
Check the reaction disk as instructed by 4.4.6.4 Reac. Disk tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101921401
Re-disk rotation error. Can't leave initial position.
8
Check the reaction disk as instructed by 4.4.6.4 Reac. Di sk tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101921402
Re-disk rotation error. Can't detect weight disk signal.
8
Check the reaction disk as instructed by 4.4.6.4 Reac. Disk tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101921500
Photoelectrical data overflow.
9
Other errors have higher priorities. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101929000
Execution result not received within specified time.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101929100
Command response wrong or no response
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
101929200
Sending analyzed instructions failed.
9
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-26
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
102409000
Bar Code Scanner handshake failed
Level 12
Correctiv e Measure Shut down the analyzing unit and start it again. Enter the Maintenance screen, select the Others tab and click the Download Settings button. If the error still appears, contact our company or your local distributor.
111282100
111282101
111282102
Sample probe v-move error. Can't reach initial position. (Re-disk)
9
Sample probe v-move error. Can't leave initial position. (Re-disk)
9
Sample probe v-move error. Not at v-initial position for d-move. (Re-disk)
9
Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-27
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
111282106
Sample probe v-move error. Illegal surface detection. (Re-disk)
Level 2
Correctiv e Measure Turn off the analyzing unit and (1) Check whether the sample tubes are placed too high on the sample disk. (2) Check the sample syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking Sample/Rea gent Syringes . (3) Check the sample probe to see if there are drops hanging on the tip. If there are, contact our company or your local distributor. (4) Check whether the sample probe is bent or scratched. Replace the damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.3 Replacing Sample Probe necessary. (5) Clean the sample probe as instructed by 5.3.1 Washing Sample Probe . If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
111282110
111282400
Sample probe v-move error. Current position prohibits v-move. (Re-disk)
9
V-position not initialized. (Re-disk)
9
Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
111442100
Reagent probe v-move error. Can't reach initial position. (Reagent disk)
9
6-28
Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
111442101
Reagent probe v-move error. Can't leave initial position. (Reagent disk)
9
Reagent probe v-move error. Not at v-initial position for d-move. (Reagent disk)
9
Reagent (Reagent probe disk) v-move error. Illegal surface detection.
0
111442102
111442106
Level
Correctiv e Measure Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Turn off the analyzing unit and (1) Check the types of the reagent bottles. (2) Check the reagent syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking Sample/R eagent Syringes . (3) Check the reagent probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe tip. If there are, contact our company or your local distributor. (4) Check whether the reagent probe is bent or scra tched. Repl damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe necessary. (5) Clean the reagent probe as instructed by 5.3.2 Washing Reagent Probe . If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
111442110
Reagent probe v-move error. Current position prohibits
9
v-move. (Reagent disk)
Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-29
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
111442400
Illegal surface detection. (Reagent disk)
Level 9
Correctiv e Measure Turn off the analyzing unit and (1) Check the types of the reagent bottles. (2) Check the reagent syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking Sample/Rea gent Syringes . (3) Check the reagent probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe tip. If there are, contact our company or your local distributor. (4) Check whether the reagent probe is bent or scrat ched. Repl damaged probe as instructed by 5.6.4 Replacing Reagent Probe necessary. (5) Clean the reagent probe as instructed by 5.3.2 Washing Reagent Probe . If this error occurs frequently, contact our company or your local distributor.
111601700
Mixing bar v-move error. Can't reach initial position. (Re-disk)
9
(1). Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor (2) Turn on the ana lyzing unit. Check the mixing bar as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
111601701
Mixing bar v-move error. Can't leave initial position. (Re-disk)
9
(1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor (2) Turn on the analyzing unit. Check the mixing bar as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-30
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
111601702
Mixing bar v-move error. Not at v-initial position for d-move. (Re-disk)
Level 9
Correctiv e Measure (1) Turn off the analyzing unit. Clean the mixing bar rotor (2) Turn on the ana lyzing unit. Check the mixing bar as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remain s, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
111601707
Mixing bar v-move error. Current position prohibits v-move. (Re-disk)
9
Other errors have higher priorities. Check the movement of the mixing at the maintenance screen. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
111602000
Robotic arm v-move error. Can't reach initial position. (Re-disk)
9
Turn on the analyzing unit and check the manipulator as instructed 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
111602001
Robotic arm v-move error. Can't leave initial position. (Re-disk)
9
Turn on the analyzing unit and check the manipulator as instructed 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
121442100
121442101
Reagent probe v-move error. Can't reach initial position. (Reagent disk)
5
Reagent probe v-move error. Can't leave initial position. (Reagent disk)
5
Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-31
Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department o your local distributor.
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
121442102
Reagent probe v-move error. Not at v-initial position for d-move. (Reagent disk)
5
Reagent probe v-move error. Current position prohibits v-move. (Reagent disk)
5
131282100
Sample (Sampleprobe disk) v-move error. Can't reach initial position.
4
Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
131282101
Sample probe v-move error. Can't leave initial position. (Sample disk)
4
Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab .
Sample probe v-move error. Not at v-initial position for d-move. (Sample disk)
4
Sample probe v-move error Current position prohibits v-move. (Sample disk)
4
121442110
131282102
131282110
Level
Correctiv e Measure Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the reagent probe as instructed by 4.4.6.2 R. Probe tab. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the sample probe as instructed by 4.4.6.1 S. Prob e tab. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-32
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
162240000
ISE unit error
Level 12
Correctiv e Measure Enter the ISE Maintenance screen of the ope rating software and click t Handshake button. If the error remains, shut down the analyzer unit and start it again. Enter the System Maintenance screen, select Others tab and click the Download Settings button. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
200000001
Re-disk actual temperature exceeds top limit.
0
Turn off the analyzing unit and check whether the ambient temperature falls into the specified range. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
200000002
Reagent actual pre-heat temperature exceeds top limit.
0
Turn off the analyzing unit and check whether the ambient tempera falls into the specified range. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
200000003
200000004
200000005
Re-disk did not reach expected temperature within specified time.
0
Reagent preheat didn't reach set temperature within specified time.
0
Re-disk temperature fluctuates over given range under normal operation
0
Check whether the ambient temperature falls into the specified range. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check whether the ambient temperature falls into the specified range. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check whether the ambient temperature falls into the specified range. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-33
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
200000006
Reagent preheat temperature fluctuate over given range under normal operation.
0
Re-disk temperature control shutdown for overheating.
0
200000007
Level
Correctiv e Measure Check whether the ambient temperature falls into the specified range. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Turn off the analyzing unit and check whether the ambient tempera falls into the specified range. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
200000008
Preheat temperature shutdown for overheating.
0
Turn off the the specified analyzingrange. unit and check whether the ambient temperature falls into Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
201280005
Sample probe syringe full.
0
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department your local distributor.
201280006
Sample probe syringe empty.
0
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department your local distributor.
201280007
Sample probe didn't detect fluid surface in Sample disk.
20
Check the sample volumes in the sample tubes.
Sample probe didn't detect fluid surface in Re-disk.
2
201280009
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Reagent unit errors have higher priority. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
201280010
Insufficient dispensing of Sample probe.
0
Check the tab dispensing ability of the sample syringe as instructed by Fluid Path . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-34
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
201440005
Reagent probe syringe full.
0
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department your local distributor.
201440006
Reagent probe syringe empty.
0
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department your local distributor.
201440007
Reagent probe didn't detect fluid surface in Reagent disk.
30
Check the reagent volumes in the reagent bottles.
Reagent probe didn't detect fluid surface in Re-disk.
3
201440009
Level
Correctiv e Measure
If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Turn off the analyzing unit and (1) Check the remaining reagents in the reagent bottles. (2) Check the reagent syringe for leakage as instructed by 5.2.1 Checking Sample/R eagent Syringes . (3) Check the reagent probe to see if there are drops hanging on the probe tip. If there are, contact our company or your local distributor. (3) Check the deionized water tank as instructed by 5.2.8 Checking Remaini ng Deionized Wa ter . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
201440010
Insufficient dispensing of Reagent probe.
0
Check the dispensing ability of the reagent syringe as instructed by Fluid Path tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
201600009
Robotic arm can't release held Re-cuvette. Unloading failed.
6
your local distributor. Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-35
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
201600010
Robotic arm can't grab used Re-cuvette from Re-disk.
Level 6
Correctiv e Measure Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remain s, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
201600011
Re-cuvette dropped from robotic arm.
0
Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
201600012
Robotic arm didn't place used Re-cuvette.
201600013
Robotic arm compartment.
201600014
didn't
grab
new
Re-cuvette
from
Re-cuvette dropped from robotic arm.
0
Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6
Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
0
Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
201600015
Robotic arm didn't place new Re-cuvette.
6
Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
201600016
Collision occurred when unloading used cuvette.
6
Operation cancelled.
Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-36
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
201600017
Collision occurred when Operation cancelled.
201600018
Level loading
new
cuvette.
Used cuvette compartment full. Storing segments may cause problem.
6
Correctiv e Measure Check the manipulator as instructed by 4.4.6.10 Autoloader tab . If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
0
Turn off the analyzing unit and empty the used-cuvette bucket instructed by 5.2.10 Emptying Used-Cuvettes Bucket. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
201600019
Compartment empty. Can't load new segment.
0
Check the remaining cuvettes in the cuvette compartment and add cuvettes as needed. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
210000001
Waste tank full
13
Check and empty the waste tank as instructed by 5.2.9 Emptying Tank. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
210000002
Deionized water tank empty.
13
Check and refill the DI water tank. If the error remains, contact Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000001
System initialization error. Can't connect main unit.
10
(1) Turn off the POWER and check the connection between the analyzing unit and the operation unit. (2) Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system. If this error remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
400000002
System initialization error. Main unit self-test abnormal.
10
Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then it. If this error remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
6-37
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
400000010
System initialization error. Serial port initialization error.
Level 10
Correctiv e Measure Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then it. If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000012
System initialization error. Can't connect printer.
0
(1) Ensure the printer is well connected to the printer. (2) Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then restart it. If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000016
System initialization abnormal.
error.
Main
unit
connection
10
(1) Turn off the POWER and check the connection between the analyzing unit and the operation unit. (2) Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then restart it. If this error remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
400000100
Power-on pretreatment error. Lamp of insufficient illumination. Replacement needed.
1
Other errors have higher priority.
400000204
Updating database failed.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000209
Can't open help file.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000216 400000220
Wrong check sum for received data Serial port error. Instruction can't be transmitted properly.
0 10
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the connection between the analyzing unit and the operation or change the serial port. Then run the control system again.
If the error remains, change the lamp or contact our company or your local distributor.
If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department o your local distributor.
6-38
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
400000221
Serial port error. Can't receive test data.
Level 10
Correctiv e Measure Check the connection between the analyzing unit and the operation or change the serial port. Then run the control system again. If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000225
Insufficient remaining reagent.
0
Check the remaining reagents for the test and add reagents to the as needed. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000251
Calibration sensitivity error.
0
Check the calibration settings and calibrators. Then recalibrate. If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000252
Calibration factor difference exceeds limit.
0
Check the calibration settings and calibrators. Then recalibrate. If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000253
400000254
Multi-point linear or non- linear correlated calibration factor (R2) exceeds limit.
0
Standard difference of calibration curve exceeds limit.
0
Check the calibration settings and calibrators. Then recalibrate. If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor. Check the calibration settings and calibrators. Then recalibrate. If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000255
Can't calculate calibration parameter by given method
0
Check the calculation method. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000276
Received data overflow.
10
6-39
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
400000281
Calibration zero concentration absorbency exceeds limit.
Level 1
Correctiv e Measure
400000282
Incomplete calibration repeat data. Can't calculate.
1
Re-calibrate.
400000283
No calibrator. Can't calculate.
1
Re-edit the calibrator settings and re-calibrate.
400000284
Reagent out.
Check the calibration settings and calibrators. Then recalibrate. If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
30
Check the remaining reagents of the test and add reagents as needed. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000286
Test cycle overtime. Can't continue.
9
Other errors have higher priority. Exit the control system and then restart it. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000287
Excessive dark current. Test prohibited.
10
Other errors have higher priority. If the error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000288
Reaction calculation error.
0
Re-run the sample. If this error occurs frequently. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000289
Response exceeds calibration range. Can't calculate result concentration.
0
Dilute the sample and rerun it.
400000290
Main unit can't recover from wrong status.
8
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-40
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
400000291
Startup pretreatment error. Wrong blank test result.
Level 10
Correctiv e Measure Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then it. If this error remains, Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
400000292
Downloading parameter failed.
10
Other errors have higher priority. Exit the control system and then restart it. If thelocal error remains, contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your distributor.
400000293
Pretreatment not finished properly.
10
This error is triggered by other errors. Check the causes of the root and take the recommended corrective measures. Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then restart it. If this error remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
400000294
Shutdown. Not finished properly.
10
This error is triggered by other errors. Check the causes of the root and take the recommended corrective measures. Use the emergency exit function to exit the control system and then restart it. If this error remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
400000296
Concentration can't be calculated.
0
Rerun or recalculate
500000001
LIS: Unconnected
0
Check if the LIS server is power on and can work properly. Check if the line between the system and the LIS can work properly. If this error remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000002
LIS: Sending HL7 message failed
0
Check if the LIS server is power on and can work properly. Check if the line between the system and the LIS can work properly. If this error remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
6-41
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
500000005
LIS: Something wrong with the network. Check the network connection.
Level 0
Correctiv e Measure Check if the LIS server is power on and can work properly. Check if the line between the system and the LIS can work properly. If this error remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000010
LIS: Segment sequence error in HL7 message
0
Downloading or sending the message again. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company o your local distributor.
500000011
LIS: Required field missing in HL7 message
0
Downloading or sending the message again. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000012
LIS: Data type error in HL7 message
0
Downloading or sending the message again. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000013
LIS: Table value not found in HL7 message
0
Downloading or sending the message again. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
6-42
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
500000014
LIS: Unsupported message type in HL7 message
Level 0
Correctiv e Measure Downloading or sending the message again. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000015
LIS: Unsupported event code in HL7 message
0
Downloading or sending the message again. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000016
LIS: Unsupported processing id in HL7 message
0
Downloading or sending the message again. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000017
LIS: Unsupported version id in HL7 message
0
Downloading or sending the message again. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000018
LIS: Unknown key identifier in HL7 message
0
Downloading or sending the message again. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
6-43
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
500000019
LIS: Duplicate key identifier in HL7 message
Level 0
Correctiv e Measure Downloading or sending the message again. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000020
LIS: Application record locked
0
Check the LIS server. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000021
LIS: Application internal error
0
Check the LIS server. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000031
LIS: Application error
0
Check the LIS server. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000032
LIS: Application reject
0
Check the LIS server. If the error remains, consult your LIS developer first. If your LIS developer cannot resolve this problem, contact our company or your local distributor.
500000040-50 LIS: Position …, no data found 0000098
0
6-44
Input the sample information manually.
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
500000099
LIS: No data found
Level 0
Correctiv e Measure Ensure there is no sample information of the current day in the LIS If there is, check the LIS server.
500000101
Bar Code Scanner communication is abnormal
0
Shut down the analyzing unit and start it again. Enter the Maintenance screen, select the Others tab and click the Download Settings button.
500000102
Bar Code Scanner communication failed
0
If the error still appears, contact our company or your local distributor. Shut down the analyzing unit and start it again. Enter the Maintenance screen, select the Others tab and click the Download Settings button. If the error still appears, contact our company or your local distributor. 600000001
ISE communication is abnormal
12
Enter the ISE Maintenance screen of the operating software and click the Handshake button. If the error remains, shut down the analyzing unit and start it again. Enter the System Maintenance screen, select the Others tab and cl Download Settings button. If the error still appears, contact our company or your local distributor.
600000002
ISE communication failed
12
Enter the ISE Maintenance screen of the operating software and click the Handshake button. If the error remains, shut down the analyzing unit and start it again. Enter the System Maintenance screen, select the Others tab and cl Download Settings button. If the error still appears, contact our company or your local distributor.
600000003
ISE: results overtime.
0
Rerun the ISE tests. If the error remains, restart the system. If the error still remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
6-45
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
600000010
Na electrode goes beyond its service days.
Level 0
Correctiv e Measure Replace the Na electrode with a new one.
600000011
K electrode goes beyond its service days.
0
Replace the K electrode with a new one. If the error remains, Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000012
Li electrode goes beyond its service days.
0
Replace the Li electrode with a new one. If the error remains, Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000013
Cl electrode goes beyond its service days.
0
Replace the Cl electrode with a new one. If the error remains, Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000014
The reference electrode goes beyond its service days.
0
Replace the reference electrode with a new one. If the error rem contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000015
The pump tubing goes beyond its service days.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000016
The fluidic tubing goes beyond its service days.
0
Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000020
Na electrode goes beyond its service times.
0
Replace the Na electrode with a new one. If the error remains, Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000021
K electrode goes beyond its service times.
0
Replace the K electrode with a new one. If the error remains, Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000022
Cl electrode goes beyond its service times.
0
Replace the Cl electrode with a new one. If the error remains, Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000023
Li electrode goes beyond its service times.
0
Replace the Li electrode with a new one. If the error remains, Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000024
The reference electrode goes beyond its service times.
0
Replace the reference electrode with a new one. If the error rem contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000030
Reading information of reagent module error.
0
Restart the system. If the error remains, replace with a new reagent module. If the error still remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
6-46
Troubleshooting Error code
Error Message
600000031
Writing information of reagent module error.
Level
Correctiv e Measure
0
Restart the system. If the error remains, replace with a new reagent module. If the error still remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
600000032
Reagent module is expired.
0
Replace with a new reagent module. If the error remains, contact Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
600000033
Reagents in reagent module exhausted.
0
Replace with a new reagent module. If the error remains, contact Customer Service Department or your local distributor.
6-47
Troubleshooting
6.2.2 Corrective Measures for ISE Unit Errors The error codes of the ISE unit (optional) are different with other ones. The error code of the ISE unit has a format of 7 characters, the format of which is <1234567>.
NOTE: Only one error code of the ISE unit has a format of 8 characters that is . You can look it as .
You can find all the seven numbers in the table below digit by digit and then know what is wrong with the ISE unit. Each digit represents a certain error. Each row represents where the error locates in. When the system reminds you of ISE error, you can open the log to find the error code. For example, when you see “0001000”, because the number 0 means no error, you need only to find where the “1” locates in the Digit 4 column. You will find it locates in + the Na+ row and you will know there is something wrong with the Na electrode. Error
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Digit 6
Digit 7
S
0
0
0
0
0
0
Air in Calibrant A Air in Calibrant B
A B
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
0 0
Air in Cleaner
C
0
0
0
0
0
0
Air Sample/Urine
in
Air in Segment
M
0
0
0
0
0
0
Pump Calibration
P
0
0
0
0
0
0
No Flow
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
Bubble Detector
D
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reagent Module
N
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reagent Read
Chip
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
Reagent Write
Chip
W
0
0
0
0
0
0
Store Calibration Value Error
Q
0
0
0
0
0
0
Command Error
T
0
0
0
0
0
0
No Error
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Na+
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
K+
0
2
2
2
2
2
2
Na+, K+
0
3
3
3
3
3
3
6-48
Troubleshooting Error
Digit 1
Digit 2
Digit 3
Digit 4
Digit 5
Digit 6
Digit 7
Li+
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
Li+, Na+
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
Li+, K+
0
6
6
6
6
6
6
Li+, K+, Na+
0
7
7
7
7
7
7
Cl-
0
8
8
8
8
8
8
Cl-, Na+
0
9
9
9
9
9
9
Cl-, K+
0
A
A
A
A
A
A
Cl-, Li+
0
B
B
B
B
B
B
Cl-, K+, Na+
0
C
C
C
C
C
C
Cl-, Li+, Na+
0
D
D
D
D
D
D
Cl-, Li+, K+
0
E
E
E
E
E
E
Cl-, Li+, K+, Na+
0
F
F
F
F
F
F
The following table lists the corrective measures of the ISE unit errors.
NOTE: The measures are all sequential, that means only after you perform the first step and the error remains, you need to go to the second step. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor if the errors not listed in the table below occur. If the corrective measures in the table below have been performed but the error remains, contact our company or your local distributor.
Digit No.
Characte r
Corrective Measure
Digit 1
S
Place sufficient sample in sample tube to account for all tests programmed. Replace the electrode leaking fluid. Take out the electrodes and install them again. Ensure that all electrodes and o-rings are in place.
Digit 1
A
Reseat electrodes. Ensure that all electrodes and o-rings are in place. Click the Clean button at the ISE Unit screen.
Digit 1
A
Replace reagent module, purge and recalibrate.
(S or B not displayed) Digit 1
B
Reseat electrodes. Ensure that all electrodes and o-rings are in place. Click the Clean button at the ISE Unit screen.
6-49
Troubleshooting Digit No.
Characte r
Corrective Measure
Digit 1
N
Move the reagent module and install it again. Click the ISE Reset button at the ISE Unit screen. Replace the reagent module with a new one. Click the ISE Reset button at the ISE Unit screen again.
Digit 4
1,2,4,8
Replace problem electrode and retest.
Digit 4
3,5-7,9,A-F
Replace reference electrode and retest.
Digit 5
1,2,4,8
Replace problem electrode and retest.
Digit 5
3,5-7,9,A-F
Replace reference electrode and retest.
Digit 6
1,2,4,8
If the electrode or the Calibrant A is new, click the Purge A button at the ISE Unit screen and recalibrate the module. If the electrode is new it may initially drift as it rehydrates over the course of 15 minutes.
Digit 6
3,5-7,9,A-F
Replace the problem electrode and retest. If an electrode or the Calibrant A is new, click the Purge A button at the ISE Unit screen and recalibrate the module. If the electrode is new it may initially drift as it rehydrates over the course of 15 minutes. Replace the reference electrode and retest. Digit 7
1-7
If low slope, replace the reagent module and retest. Remove the reference electrode, tap to dislodge bubble, install it back, and recalibrate. Replace the reference electrode. Replace the problem electrode.
6-50
7 Calculation Methods
7.1
Reacti on Typ es The analyzer can perform calculations for three reaction types:
Endpoint
Fixed-time
Kinetic
7.1.1 Endpoint The endpoint reaction is the most ideal. The reaction reaches equilibrium after certain period. Because the equilibrium constant is very large, it can be considered that all substrates have changed into products, and the absorbance of the reacting liquid does not change any more. The absorbance change is proportional to the amount of the product present.
Figure 7-1 Endpoint reaction A
t1
t2
t3
t
As shown in Figure 7-1, t1 is the time when the reagent is added, and t 2 is the time when the sample is added. The reaction starts when they are mixed. At t 3 the reaction reaches the equilibrium and the absorbance reading is taken. The reaction time is t 3 − t 2 . The Endpoint reaction is not subject to such condition changes as enzyme concentration, pH value and temperature, as long as the changes are not significant enough to affect the reaction time.
7.1.2 Fixed-Time For the fixed-time reaction, the reaction velocity (v), within a specific period, is proportional to the substrate concentration [S], namely, v=k[S]. As the substrate is
7-1
Calculation Methods consumed continuously, the reaction velocity becomes smaller and smaller, and so does the change rate of the absorbance. It takes much time for such a reaction to reach the equilibrium. Theoretically, the absorbance reading can be taken at any time. The reaction can, however, become steady only after a delay because it is complicated at the beginning and there are miscellaneous reactions due to the complex serum compositions. For any first order reaction, the substrate concentration [S] at a specific time (t) during the reaction is:
[S] =[ S] 0
×e
− kt
Where, [S0] e k
- srcinal substrate concentration - base of the natural logarithm - velocity constant
Within the interval between t1 and t 2 , the relationship between ∆[S] (delta substrate concentration) and [S0] is:
[ S 0] =
− ∆[
e
− kt1
−
S] e
− kt 2
That is, within a fixed time interval, the delta substrate concentration is proportional to the srcinal substrate concentration, which is the generality of the first order reactions. Within this interval, absorbance change is proportional to the substrate concentration. See Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Fixed-time reaction A
t1 t2 t3
t4
t
As shown in Figure 7-2, t1 is the time when the reagent is added and t 2 is the time when the sample is added. From t 3 the reaction becomes steady and t 4 is the time to stop monitoring the reaction. The absorbance readings are respectively taken at t 3 and t 4 . Methodologically, the fixed-time method requires more than the endpoint method does. All factors that have effects on the reaction velocity, such as pH, temperature and enzyme concentration, must keep constant in the two-point analysis. In addition, the timing must be precise and the calibration is necessary.
7-2
Calculation Methods
7.1.3 Kinetic For the kinetic reaction, the reaction velocity is not related to the substrate concentration and remains constant in the reaction process. As a result, for a given wavelength, the absorbance of the reacting liquid changes evenly, and the change rate (∆A/min) is proportional to the activity or concentration of the subject, which is usually the enzyme. In fact, it is impossible for the substrate concentration to be large enough, and the reaction will no longer a zeroth order reaction when the substrate is consumed to a certain degree. Therefore, the theory only stands within certain period. In addition, the reaction can become steadyand onlythere afterare a certain period because the due reaction is complicated at the beginning miscellaneous reactions to the complex serum compositions. All reagent manufacturers have strict specifications for these two periods. See Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-3 Kinetic reaction
A
t1
t2 t3
tn
t
As shown in Figure 7-3, t1 is the time when the reagent is added. t 2 is the time when the sample is added. From t 3 the reaction becomes steady. t n is the time to stop testing the reaction. t 3 − t 2 is the time delay, and t n − t 3 is the monitoring time.
7.2
Calcu latio n Process The figure below shows the measurement and calculation flow of the analyzer.
AD Value
Absorbance Response Calibration Parameter
Test Result
QC Result QC Conclusion
7-3
Calculation Methods
7.2.1 AD Value
Ab sor bance
Figure 7-4 How the liquid absorbs light
I0
It
L
As shown in Figure 7-4, when a parallel monochromatic light beam whose intensity is I 0 goes through a flow cell (whose length is L ) containing a solution (whose concentration is C ), some photons are absorbed, and the intensity is attenuated from I 0 to I t , so the absorbance A of this solution is:
A = − Lg
It I0
Where,
It I0
- transmissivity
The analyzer measures the light intensity through the photo-electric conversion, linear amplification and A/D conversion. For the light intensity signal I i of Channel i, the AD output Di is:
Di = K pe ⋅ K a ⋅ K ad ⋅ I i Where,
K pe - photo electric conversion factor K a - linear amplification factor K ad - A/D conversion factor Di - data of Channel i Ii
- light intensity of Channel i
So,
Ai = lg
Ii0 Ii
= lg
Di 0 Di
7-4
Calculation Methods Where,
Ai
- absorbance of Channel i
Di 0 - background AD output Di
- AD output after the substrate is added.
In theory, when the lights are off, the AD output of each channel will be zero. In practice, because of the existence of dark currents, there is still a background output Dibackground , which should be deducted. Then, the complete absorbance formula should be:
Di 0 − Dibackground
Ai = lg
Di − Dibackground
7.2.2 Ab sor bance
Resp ons e
For the analyzer, the response (R) is defined as the absorbance change before and after the reaction, or the absorbance change rate during the reaction process. The formula for calculating the response (R) is closely related to the reaction type (kinetic, fixed-time, endpoint), the number of reagents (single, double), and the number of wavelengths (single or double). They are respectively detailed in the following sections.
7.2.2.1 Calcul ating the response of the endpoin t reacti on
Single-reagent and single-wavelength
Figure 7-5 Endpoint reaction with single-reagent and single-wavelength A
t1
t2
t3
t
As shown in Figure 7-5, t1 is the time when the reagent (volume: V) is added. t2 is the time when the sample (volume: S) is added. The reaction starts when they are mixed. At t 3 the reaction reaches the equilibrium and the absorbance reading is taken. t 3 − t 2 is the reaction time. So,
R = Rs − RSMPB
7-5
Calculation Methods Both of Rs and RSMPB are calculated with the formula R＝At − K1 × At 3
2 −1
.
Where,
Rs
- response of reaction mixture
RSMPB - response of sample blank. If the sample blank has not been requested, RSMPB =0. At 3
- absorbance at
t3
At 2 −1 - absorbance at the previous point before t2 K1 K1 =
- single-reagent test volume coefficient. If the start time of reaction is 0,
V V +S
; otherwise, K1 ＝1.
Single-reagent and double-wavelength
The calculation method is similar to that for the single-reagent and single-wavelength reaction, except for every measurement period, the absorbance is Aλ1 − Aλ 2 , where,
Aλ 1 is the absorbance at the primary wavelength, and
Aλ 2 is the
absorbance obtained under the secondary wavelength.
Double-reagent and single-wavelength
Figure 7-6 Endpoint reaction with double-reagent and single-wavelength A
t1
t2
t3
t4
t
As shown in Figure 7-6, t1 is the time when reagent 1 (volume: V 1) is added. t 2 is the time when the sample (volume: S) is added. Then, reagent 1 and the sample are mixed. t 3 is the time when the reagent 2 (volume: V2) is added. Then, reagent 2 is mixed into the reaction liquid. At t4 the reaction reaches equilibrium. t3 − t2 is the incubation period, and t 4 − t 3 is the reaction time. So,
R = Rs − RRB
7-6
Calculation Methods Both of Rs and RRB are calculated with the formula R = At − K 2 × An . 4 Where,
Rs - response of reaction mixture RRB - response of double-reagent blank
At4 - absorbance at t 4 An
- absorbance at the start time of reaction
K 2 - double-reagent volume coefficient. If the start time of reaction is 0, K 2 = 0; if V1 + S the start time of reaction is more than 0, K 2 = 1; otherwise, K 2 = . V1 + S + V2
Double-reagent and double-wavelength
The calculation method is similar to that for double-reagent and single-wavelength reaction, except for every measurement period, the absorbance is Aλ1 − Aλ 2 , where, Aλ1 is the absorbance obtained at the primary wavelength, and Aλ 2 is the absorbance obtained at the secondary wavelength.
7.2.2.2 Calcul ating the response of the fixed-time rea cti on
Single-wavelength (for both single-reagent and double-reagent)
Figure 7-7 Fixed-time reaction with single-wavelength (single reagent) A
t1 t2 t3
t4
t
As shown in Figure 7-7, t1 is the time when the reagent (volume: V) is added and
t 2 is the time when the sample (volume: S) is added. t 3 is the time from which the reaction becomes steady. t4
is the time the test on the reaction is stopped.
Absorbance is taken respectively at t 3 , t4 and the response R is:
R=
At4 − At3 t4 − t3
7-7
Calculation Methods
Double-wavelength
The response is:
R=
( Atλ41 − Atλ42 ) − ( Atλ31 − Atλ3 2 ) t4 − t3
Where, λ
At41 - primary wavelength absorbance at t4 Atλ42
- secondary wavelength absorbance at t4
Atλ31 - primary wavelength absorbance at t 3 Atλ3 2
- secondary wavelength absorbance at t 3
7.2.2.3 Calcul ating the response of the kinetic reaction
Single-wavelength (for both single-reagent and double-reagent)
Figure 7-8 Kinetic reaction with single-wavelength (single reagent)
A
t1
t2 t3
tn
t
As shown in the figure, t1 is the time when the reagent (volume: V) is added. t 2 is the time when the sample (volume: S) is added. t 3 is the time from which the reaction becomes steady. tn is the time when the test on the reaction is stopped.
t 3 − t 2 is the time delay, and t n − t 3 is the reaction time. The response ( R ) is equal to the slope of the linear section between t
and t . 3
n
Double-wavelength
The calculation method is similar to that for the single-wavelength reaction. The only difference is that the absorbance at a certain point is equal to the primary wavelength absorbance minus the secondary wavelength absorbance.
7-8
Calculation Methods
7.2.3 Resp ons e
Calib rati on Parameter
The analyzer provides two calibration methods: linear calibration and nonlinear calibration. The linear calibration includes the single-point linear calibration (also called factor method), two-point linear calibration (also called linear method), and multi-point (over 3 points) linear calibration (also called linear regression method). They are mainly used for tests determined by colorimetry. The nonlinear calibration includes Logistic-Log 4P, Logistic-Log 5P, Exponential5P, Polynomial5P, turbidimetry. Parabola and Spline. They are mainly used for tests determined by
7.2.3.1 Calcul ations of linear ca lib ration parame ters
Single-point linear calibration
Calibration formula: R = KC Where,
R - calibrator response C
- calibrator concentration (or activity)
K - calibration parameter This calibration method adopts only one calibration parameter K , and K =
R C
.
This calibration method requires only one calibrator. For most enzyme tests, you can input the factor directly (input value F=1/ K ) without any calibration.
Two-point linear calibration
Calibration formula: R = KC + b Where,
R - calibrator response C - calibrator concentration (or activity)
K , b - calibration parameters This calibration method adopts two calibration parameters: K and
K=
R2 − R1 C 2 − C1
7-9
b.
Calculation Methods
b = R1 − (
R2 − R1 C 2 − C1
) × C1
This calibration method requires two calibrators. C 1 and C 2 are respectively the concentrations of calibrator 1 and calibrator 2. R 1 and R 2 are respectively the responses of calibrator 1 and calibrator 2.
Multi-point linear calibration
Calibration formula: R = KC + b Where,
R - calibrator response C - calibrator concentration (or activity)
K , b - calibration parameters This calibration method adopts two calibration parameters: K and n
n
b.
n
∑ CiRi − (∑ Ci)(∑ Ri) / n K=
i =1
i =1 n
∑ Ci
i =1 n
2
− (∑ Ci ) / n
i =1
2
i =1
n n
b = ( ∑ Ri) / n − [ i =1 i =1
n
n
∑ CiRi − ( ∑ Ci)( ∑ Ri) / n i =1 n
∑ Ci
2
i =1 n
2
− ( ∑ Ci ) / n
i =1
n
]( ∑ Ci ) / n i =1
i =1
This calibration method requires n (n≥3) calibrators. calibrator i. R i is the response of calibrator i.
C i is the concentration of
7.2.3.2 Calcul ations of nonli near calib ration para meters
Logistic-Log 4P
1
Calibration formula: R = R0 + K
1 + exp[−( a + b ln C )] Where,
R - calibrator response
C - calibrator concentration (activity) K , R 0, a , b - calibration parameter
7-10
Calculation Methods This calibration method adopts four parameters: K , R 0, a and
b.
This calibration method requires at least four calibrators. The concentration (or activity) of calibrator 1 is 0, and the corresponding R is equal to R 0. This calibration method is applied to the calibration curve that the response becomes smaller and smaller with the concentration increase. See Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-9 Logistic–Log 4P calibration curve R
C1
C2
C3
C4
C
Logistic-Log 5P
Calibration formula: R = R0 + K
1 1 + exp[ −( a + b ln C + cC )]
Where,
R - calibrator response
C - calibrator concentration (activity) K , R 0, a , b , c - calibration parameter This calibration method adopts five parameters: K , R 0, a ,
b and c .
This calibration method requires at least five calibrators. The concentration (or activity) of calibrator 1 is 0, and the corresponding R is equal to R 0. The applications of the calibration method are the same with that of Logistic-Log 4P, but this method has a higher fitting.
Exponential 5P 2
3
Calibration formula: R = R0 + K exp[a ln C + b(ln C ) + c (ln C ) ] Where,
R - calibrator response
C - calibrator concentration (activity) K , R 0, a , b , c - calibration parameter This calibration method adopts five parameters: K , R 0, a ,
7-11
b and c .
Calculation Methods This calibration method requires at least five calibrators. The concentration (or activity) of calibrator 1 is 0, and the corresponding R is equal to R 0. This calibration method is applied to the calibration curve that the response increases sharply when the concentration reaches a specific value. See Figure 7-10.
Figure 7-10 Exponential 5p calibration curve
R
C1 C2
C3
C4
C5
C
Polynomial 5P
Calibration formula: ln C =
a + b(
R − R0 100
) + c(
R − R0 100
)2 + d (
R − R0 100
)3
Where,
R - calibrator response
C - calibrator concentration (activity) R 0, a , b , c , d - calibration parameter This calibration method adopts five parameters: R 0, a ,
b , c and d .
This calibration method requires at least five calibrators. The concentration (or activity) of calibrator 1 is 0, and the corresponding R is equal to R 0. This calibration method is applied to the calibration curve that the response increases sharply when the concentration reaches a specific value.
Parabola Calibration formula: R = aC 2 + bC + c Where,
R - calibrator response
C - calibrator concentration (activity) a , b , c - calibration parameter
7-12
Calculation Methods This calibration method adopts three parameters: a ,
b and c .
This calibration method requires at least three calibrators.
Spline 2
Calibration formula: R = R0 i + a i (C − C i ) + bi (C − C i ) + ci (C − C i )
3
Where,
R - calibrator response
C - calibrator concentration (activity) R0i , ai , bi , ci
- calibration parameter, i =1, 2,…, n-1, n - number of calibrators
This calibration method adopts 4(n-1) parameters: R0 i , ai , bi and ci . This calibration method requires 2-6 calibrators. Because this method adopts the segment fitting, its fitting degree is the highest among all calibration types.
7.2.4 Calib rati on Parameter
Test Resul t/QC Resu lt
The calculations of test results vary with different calibration types.
7.2.4.1 Result calcul ations afte r linear calibr ations
Single-point linear calibration
C=
R K
Where, K - calibration parameter
Or, C = R×F
Where, F - input factor.
Two-point linear calibration
7-13
Calculation Methods
C=
R−b K
Where, K, b - calibration parameters
Multi-point linear calibration
R−b C=
K
Where, K, b - calibration parameters
7.2.4.2 Result calcul ations afte r nonl inear calibr ations
Logistic-Log 4P
− a − ln(
C = EXP(
K R − R0 b
− 1)
)
Where, R0, K, a, b
- calibration parameters
Logistic-Log 5P
Obtain the positive real root with the dichotomy method.
Exponential 5P
Obtain the positive real root with the dichotomy method.
Polynomial5P
C = exp( a + b ( R − R 0 ) + c ( R − R 0 ) 2 + d ( R − R 0 ) 3 ) 100 100 100 Where, R0, a, b, c, d
- calibration parameters
Parabola
7-14
Calculation Methods Obtain the positive real root of the following linear quadratic equation:
aC 2 + bC + c − R = 0 .
Spline
Obtain the positive real root with the dichotomy method.
7.2.5 QC Resu lt
QC Concl us ion −
The analyzer provides four QC rules: Westgard multi-rule, X -R, Cumulative sum check and cumulative error.
7.2.5.1 West gard mul ti -rul e Westgard multi-rule includes ten sub-rules. The clinical meanings of the ten sub-rules are as follows: Symbol
Definit ion
QC Conclusion
12S
There is 1 point falling out of the range from the average+2SD to the average-2SD.
Warning
13S
There is 1 point falling out of the range from
Out-of-control (random
the average+3SD to the average-3SD. 22S
R4S
There are 2 adjacent points falling out of the range from the average+2SD to the average-2SD. There are 2 continuous values whose difference exceeding 4SD.
error, system error) Out-of-control (system error) Out-of-control (random error)
41S
There are 4 adjacent points falling out of the range from the average+1SD to the average-1SD.
Out-of-control (system error)
10X
There are 10 adjacent points falling on the same side of the average.
Out-of-control (system error)
7-15
Calculation Methods QC conclusion flow:
QC Data
No
within control
1 2S Yes
No 13 S Yes
No 22 S
R4 S
Yes
No
No 41 S
Yes
Yes
No 10 x
Yes
out-of-control
7.2.5.2 X -R This rule obtains the difference (R) between two tested values (X 1 and X2) of a same control, and then compares it with the input SD R. If R is larger than 2SD R or smaller than -2SDR, the rule considers it out-of-control. The value of SD R should be obtained in the following procedures: After pre-testing the control, test it continuously for 20 days. Test it twice before and after adding the sample everyday. Obtain the SD R of the difference (R) between two tested values (X 1 and X2).
7.2.5.3 Cumulativ e sum check Rule
Threshold (k)
Control Limi t (h)
CS-(1.0SD: 2.7SD)
±1.0SD
±2.7SD
CS-(1.0SD: 3.0SD)
±1.0SD
±3.0SD
CS-(0.5SD: 5.1SD)
±0.5SD
±5.1SD
1
This rule obtains the value of k and the control limit h.
2
When the QC value is no larger than the value of k, no processing is required.
3
When the QC value overruns the value of k (larger than the upper limit or smaller than the lower limit), the system starts to calculate the cumulative sum.
4
For subsequent data, the system continues to calculate the cumulative sum.
5
When the symbol changes (from positive to negative, or from negative to positive) with the cumulative sum, the system stops the calculation and resets the cumulative sum. For subsequent data, the system continues to calculate the cumulative sum.
7-16
Calculation Methods When the cumulative sum overruns the control limit h (larger than the upper limit or smaller than the lower limit), the system considers it out-of-control.
6
7.2.5.4 Cumulati ve error This rule calculates the difference (error, expressed with the symbol plus or minus) between the tested value and target value of a test of a control. st
1 day
cumulative error
nd
2 day rd
3 day
1
= error1
cumulative error
2
= error1 + error2
cumulative error
3
= cumulative error2 + error3
… th
n day
cumulative error n = cumulative error n-1 + errorn
When the cumulative error overruns the cumulative error limit E or –E, the system considers it out-of-control.
7.2.5.5 Twin-plot
+3SD +2SD
Χ
-2SD -3SD -3SD -2SD
Y
+2SD +3SD
The QC chart, which can sensitively indicate system errors and random errors, is present to help you make a QC conclusion.
7.3
Calcu latio n Metho d of ISE Unit (optio nal) An ion selective electrode develops a voltage that varies with the concentration of the ion to which it responds. The relationship between the voltage developed and the concentration of the sensed ion is logarithmic, as expressed by the Nernst equation: Ex = Es + RT/nF log ( µ C) Where, Ex - the potential of the electrode in sample solution
7-17
Calculation Methods Es - the potential developed under standard conditions RT/nF - a temperature dependent “constant”, termed the slope(s) Log - base ten logarithm function µ
- activity coefficient of the measured ion in the solution
C - concentration of the measured ion in the solution
The calculation process of the concentration of the ion in the sample is as the following steps. First, the module measures the potential of the calibrant A and calibrant B and calculates the slope S of the electrode with the formula below. S=
EA − EB C log A CB
where, S – the slope of the electrode EA – the potential of the calibrant A EB – the potential of the calibrant B CA – the concentration of calibrant A CB – the concentration of calibrant B
Second, the module calculates the concentration of the ion in the sample with the formula below. E X −E A
C X = C A × 10
S
Where, Cx – the concentration of the ion in the sample Ex – the potential of the sample CA – the concentration of the calibrant A EA – the potential of the calibrant A S – the slope of the electrode
7-18
Appendix A
A.1
Specifications
Technical Spec ifications
Throughput: maximum 300tests/h; if the ISE unit (optional) is connected, maximum 420tests/h (Na, K and Cl included) or maximum 480tests/h (Na, K, Cl and Li included) Tests analyzed simultaneously: 48 (single-reagent) / 24 (double-reagent); if the ISE unit (optional) is connected, 3 (Na, K and Cl included) or 4 (Na, K, Cl and Li included) tests are added
Test types: Endpoint, Fixed-time and Kinetic. All supporting monochromatics and bichromatics
Sample volume: 3µl-45µl; for the ISE unit (optional), 70µl serum, 70µl plasma, 140µl diluted urine; precision: 0.5µl
Sample Disk: 60 sample tube positions; 5 virtual disks for maximum 300 samples
Compatible sample containers: micro-tubes, collection tubes and test tubes of the following sizes: Φ12mm×68.5mm, Φ12mm×99mm, Φ12.7mm×75mm, Φ12.7mm×100mm
STAT samples: can be inserted immediately for analysis with higher priority
Sample probe: with a built-in level detector; equipped with bump collision safeguard; capable of tracking sample level
Washing function: automatically washing interiors and exteriors of sample probe
Auto rerun
Reagent volume: 30µl -450µl; precision 1µl
Reagent disk: 50 bottle positions; 2 virtual disks
Compatible reagent bottles: Mindray inner-circle bottles, Mindray outer-circle bottles, Hitachi 7060 bottles, Hitachi 7170 bottles and Hitachi 20ml bottles
Reagent probe: with a built-in level detector; equipped with bump collision safeguard; capable of tracking reagent level
Washing function: automatically washing interiors and exteriors of reagent probe
Refrigerator: capable of running 24 hours a day to keep the temperature at 4-10 ℃
Mixing bar: for single-reagent tests, it functions immediately (within the same period) after sample dispensing; for double-reagent tests, it functions immediately (within the same period) dispensing of the second reagent.
Reaction disk: 80 reaction cuvettes
Reaction temperature: 37℃
Compatible cuvettes: 5×6×25; 5mm optical length; disposable; 750µl
Reaction volume: 180-500µl
Auto cuvette load/unloading mechanism
A-1
Specifications
A.2
A.3
Photometric system: interference filters of various wavelengths; static fiber optics
Wavelength: 340nm, 405nm, 450nm, 510nm, 546nm, 578nm, 630nm, 670nm, 700nm
Measurement period: 12 seconds
Measurement range: 0.1-4.0 Abs
Lamp: tungsten-halogen; 12V, 50VA
Power Requirements
Power supply: 100-130V/200-240V~, 50/60Hz, three-wire power cord and properly grounded
Input power: 1000VA
Environmental Requirements
Temperature: 15℃- 30℃
Humidity: 35% - 80%, no condensation
Atmospheric pressure: 800 hPa - 1,060 hPa
Above-sea-level height: -1,300feet- 6,500 feet -400m-2,000 m
A.4
A.5
Dimension and Weight
Dimension: 980mm×710mm×1200mm (W×D×H)
Weight: 175kg
Oth er Spec ifications
The analyzing unit meets the requirements of EN 61326:2003, Class A
Sound data: ≤ 70dB
Fuse: 250VAC T1.6A 250VAC T2A 250VAC T6.3A 250VAC T10A
A.6
Input/Out put Devices
PC Keyboard
PC Mouse
Printer
Display
A-2
Specifications
A.7
A.8
Interface
LIS interface: HL7 interface developed by Mindray
Interface between Analyzing Unit and Operation Unit: RS-232
Built-in Sample Bar Code Scanner (optional) The scanner can read the bar code that meets the following requirements:
Symbologies: Code 128, Code 39, Codabar, ITF, UPC/EAN, Code93 Feature size: 0.19-0.50mm
Length: 3-16
Thin bar: thick bar: 1:2.5-3
Height: 10mm or more
Printing: black print on white background; the minimum acceptable symbol grade is Class C as defined in the ANSI Print Quality Specification.
The bar code labels can be applied to the following sample tubes.
A.9
Φ12mm ×99mm
Φ12.7mm×75mm
Φ12.7mm×100mm
ISE Mod ule (optional) +
+
-
+
Electrodes: Na electrode, K electrode, Cl electrode, Li electrode and reference electrode
Sample: serum, plasma, urine
Sample volume: 70 µl serum, 70 µl plasma, 140 µl diluted urine
Urine dilution: automatically performed by the system
Test ranges: An alyte (serum, p lasma)
Test range lim it (mmol/l)
K+
1.00-8.00
Na+
100.0-200.0
Cl-
50.0-150.00
Li+
0.2-3.50
An alyte (uri ne)
Test range lim it (mmol /l)
K+
5-200
Na+
10-500
Cl-
15-400
A-3
Appendix B
Supplies
To ensure personal safety and system performance, use only supplies manufactured or recommended by Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. Contact Mindray Customer Service Department or your local distributor for details.
Replacin g Parts and Consumables Descript ion
Part Numbe r
Location
Remarks
Lamp
BA30-10-06365
Lamp box
Replacing part Replace it when 1) It serves for over 1000h; or 2) The system prompts.
Plunger assembly reagent syringe
of
0040-10-32317
Reagent syringe
Replacing part Replace it when 1) It serves for 3 months; 2) It runs for 100,000 times; or 3) It is seriously damaged.
Sample syringe gasket
Reagent syringe gasket
Reagent probe assembly
0040-10-32303
0040-10-32303
BA30-30-06753
Connection part between the sample syringe and the T-piece
Replacing part
Connection part between the reagent syringe and the T-piece
Replacing part
Reagent
Replacing part
probe arm
Replace it when
Replace it when the sample syringe is disassembled for 2 - 3 times.
Replace it when the reagent syringe is disassembled for 2 - 3 times.
1) It serves for 1 year; or 2) It is damaged or bent.
B-1
Supplies Descript ion
Part Numbe r
Location
Remarks
Sample probe assembly
BA30-30-14978
Sample probe arm
Replacing part Replace it when 1) It serves for 1 year; or 2) It is damaged or bent.
Sample probe gasket
0040-10-32307
Nut on the sample
Replacing part
probe
Replace it when 1) The sample probe is disassembled for 2 - 3 times; or 2) The sample probe is replaced with a new one.
Reagent probe gasket
0040-10-32307
Nut on the reagent probe
Replacing part Replace it when 1) The reagent probe is disassembled for 2 - 3 times; or 2) The reagent probe is replaced with a new one.
Mixing bar
BA30-20-06775
Mixing arm
bar
Replacing part Replace it when it is damaged.
A4 copy paper
0150-10-00381
Printer
Consumable
Reaction cuvette
BA30-20-15179
Reaction disk
Consumable
Mindray inner-circle bottle
BA30-20-15058
Reagent disk
Consumable
Mindray outer-circle bottle
BA30-20-15059
Reagent disk
Consumable
+
electrode (optional) K
BA34-10-63641
ISE unit (optional)
Consumable
BA34-10-63642
ISE unit (optional)
Consumable
-
BA34-10-63639
ISE unit (optional)
Consumable
+
BA34-10-63644
ISE unit (optional)
Consumable
+
Naelectrode (optional) Cl electrode (optional) Li electrode (optional) Reference (optional)
electrode
BA34-10-63640
B-2
ISE unit (optional)
Consumable
Supplies Descript ion
Part Numbe r
Location
Remarks
BA34-10-63643
ISE unit (optional)
Consumable
Kit
BA34-10-63645
ISE unit (optional)
Consumable
Reagent Module (optional)
BA34-10-63673
ISE unit (optional)
Consumable
Urine Dilution (optional)
BA34-10-63671
ISE unit (optional)
Consumable
ISE control
BA34-10-63669
ISE unit (optional)
Consumable
Spacer (optional) Cleaning (optional)
electrode Solution
B-3
Appendix C
Index calibration result............. 4-31, 4-83 Calibrator ......1-4, 4-12, 4-15, 4-16, 4-30, 4-44, 4-45, 4-69, 4-70, 4-71, 4-72, 4-73, 4-74, 4-75, 4-76, 4-78, 4-80, 4-93
absorbance...... 1-15, 3-4, 4-3, 4-41, 4-42, 4-44, 4-45, 4-45, 4-46 acid ................................. 4-38, 4-39
carryover ................................8, 3-5
Acid wash solution ....................5-2
administrator authority .......... 4-141
check box1-19, 3-6, 4-3, 4-17, 4-43, 4-51, 4-96, 4-97, 4-98, 4-134, 4-135, 4-136, 4-137, 4-167, 4-168
Air bubble................................ 5-45
Circle
alarm........ 1-13, 1-18, 4-134, 4-135
inner .......................................... 1-4
alkaline .................................... 4-39
outer .......................................... 1-4
Alkaline wash solution .............. 5-2
clinical...........................................1
analyzing unit . 7, 1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 1-8, 1-9, 1-10, 1-12, 1-13,
Combo box...............................1-19
administrator...................3-4, 4-141
1-14, 3-2, 3-3, 3-4, 3-8, 4-39
Communication........... .............. 1-4
ANALYZING UNIT POWER.. 3-3, 3-8, 4-39
control 7, 1-4, 3-4, 4-13, 4-16, 4-32, 4-38, 4-39, 4-88, 4-89, 4-90, 4-91, 4-92, 4-93, 4-94, 4-95, 4-97, 4-98, 4-101, 4-102, 4-104, 4-106, 4-107
Assembly reagent disk................................1-9
control system 7, 3-3, 3-4, 4-1, 4-38 cuvette loader ................... 1-2, 1-12 backgrounds............................... 3-4 Biohazard waste disposal......... 5-45 dark currents.............................. 3-4 bottle used by reagent 1........... 4-64
Data..... 9, 1-17, 3-6, 3-7, 4-1, 4-17, 4-19, 4-21, 4-23, 4-27, 4-30, 4-33, 4-82, 4-120
bottle used by reagent 2........... 4-64
decimal.....................................4-42 calibration..................................3-5
Deionized Water........................ 1-3
calibration curve ... 4-31, 4-78, 4-83
deionized water tank ................. 3-3
calibration parameter .....4-12, 4-47, 4-48, 4-67, 4-76, 4-78, 4-79
department name........ 4-142, 4-143
C-1
Index Detector
Help ................................. 1-17, 4-1
deionized water level.................1-3
horizontal position......1-4, 1-5, 1-9, 1-10
waste level ................................. 1-4 hospital name .........................4-142 dialog box ..... 1-18, 3-4, 4-16, 4-22, 4-23, 4-26, 4-27, 4-38, 4-39, 4-40, 4-47, 4-48, 4-51, 4-61, 4-67, 4-72, 4-83, 4-88, 4-92, 4-118, 4-133, 4-135, 4-137, 4-138, 4-141, 4-167, 4-168,
Humidity ................................... 2-2 hydrochloric .............................4-38
4-170 Diluents .....................................1-4
Incubation ....................... 3-4, 4-43
dilution ratio ............................ 4-46
inner circle ....................... 1-4, 4-63
Door middle........................................ 1-8
Javel water ................................ 5-2
double-reagent1-12, 4-2, 4-12, 4-13, 4-41, 4-43, 4-46, 4-63 Kinetic4-12, 4-41, 4-42, 4-43, 4-45, 4-137 edit box 1-20, 4-2, 4-42, 4-43, 4-45, 4-46, 4-70, 4-71, 4-75, 4-77, 4-78, 4-90, 4-91, 4-94, 4-98, 4-99, 4-134, 4-139, 4-142, 4-144, 4-145, 4-170
lamp .......................................... 3-5 linearity .......................... 4-42, 4-46
Endpoint ..... 4-12, 4-41, 4-43, 4-44, 4-45, 4-137
lower door ................................1-12
Equilibrium..............................5-46
lower limit.............4-49, 4-50, 4-50
Finished . 3-6, 3-7, 4-16, 4-17, 4-18
MAIN POWER.............................7
first reagent.....................4-46, 4-67
maintenance .................................. 7
Fixed Time ............................ 4-137
menu............................. 2, 1-17, 4-1 middle door ............. 1-8, 1-10, 1-14 mixer ........................................1-12
Gasket...................................... 5-44
mixing bar4, 7, 1-12, 3-2, 3-4, 4-39, 4-134 handle ............ 5, 1-4, 1-5, 1-9, 1-10 Handwheel......... 1-4, 1-5, 1-9, 1-10
operation unit ........ 7, 1-1, 1-4, 1-16
C-2
Index optical path .....................1-14, 1-15 option button.................1-19, 4-136
QC parameter ....... 4-47, 4-48, 4-88, 4-99
outer circle........................1-4, 4-63 QC rules ...................................4-95 output unit.........................1-1, 1-16 QC test ......................... 4-88, 4-134
Parameters ..... 1-17, 3-5, 4-1, 4-39, 4-40, 4-41, 4-61, 4-67, 4-96, 4-97
R1 blank...................................4-46
password3-4, 4-27, 4-40, 4-61, 4-67, 4-88, 4-133, 4-141
reaction curve.......4-17, 4-18, 4-19, 4-23, 4-26, 4-27, 4-30, 4-32, 4-87, 4-120
patient report.......4-23, 4-27, 4-166, 4-167
reaction cuvette1-2, 1-8, 1-10, 1-11, 1-12, 1-14, 1-15, 4-18
photometric system...........1-15, 3-4
reaction disk..1-8, 1-11, 1-12, 1-13, 1-14, 1-15, 3-4, 4-18
Position reaction disk diagram ...............4-18 tube ............................................ 1-4 reagent blank.......... ........ 4-15, 4-46 position for reagent 1............... 4-63 reagent bottle...1-9, 1-10, 1-11, 3-5, 3-8, 4-64, 4-66
position for reagent 2............... 4-63 Power..................................3-3, 3-8
reagent disk ...7, 1-9, 1-10, 3-5, 3-8, 4-62, 4-63, 4-64
cord.................................... 2-2, A-2 reagent dispenser......................1-10 socket.........................................2-2 reagent syringe .......... 1-8, 1-10, 3-2 power socket.......................2-2, 3-2 Refrigerator ............................... 1-9 power supply .............. 1-9, 2-2, 3-2 relative humidity ................ 2-2, 2-3 primary wavelength................. 4-42 report header ..........................4-166 printing order ..............4-166, 4-168
Requested,.......................... 3-6, 3-7 probe............................... 5-31, 5-37 re-runs ....................................4-133 probe arm..........................1-7, 1-10 probe rotor ........................1-7, 1-10
response.......4-45, 4-46, 4-77, 4-78, 4-137
probe tip..................................... 3-2
response range........................4-137
profile ........................................ 4-7
Routine 1-17, 4-1, 4-11, 4-13, 4-14, 4-38, 4-133, 4-134 Running ............................. 3-6, 3-7
C-3
Index sample ....................................... 1-7
System 2, 1-1, 1-15, 1-17, 1-18, 3-3, 3-7, 4-1, 4-133, 4-141, 4-165
Sample disk ............................................ 1-4 dispenser.................................... 1-7
tab...... 1-18, 4-15, 4-17, 4-18, 4-19, 4-20, 4-21, 4-22, 4-23, 4-25, 4-27, 4-28, 4-29, 4-30, 4-31, 4-32, 4-33, 4-41, 4-47, 4-48,
probe...................................1-4, 1-7 probe arm................................... 1-7 probe rotor ................................. 1-7
4-49, 4-76, 4-62, 4-88, 4-63, 4-89, 4-66, 4-94, 4-68, 4-95, 4-98, 4-120, 4-134, 4-135, 4-136, 4-138, 4-142, 4-143, 4-144, 4-146, 4-166, 4-167, 4-168, 4-170
sample cup.................................1-4 sample disk7, 8, 1-4, 1-5, 1-10, 3-5, 3-6, 3-7, 3-8, 4-3, 4-12, 4-13, 4-15, 4-16, 4-17, 4-69, 4-89, 4-120
temperature1-9, 1-14, 1-18, 2-2, 2-3, 3-4
sample disk diagram ................ 4-15
test report ................... 4-166, 4-168
sample dispenser........................1-7
Tube .......................................... 1-4
sample probe...4, 7, 8, 1-4, 1-5, 1-7, 1-8, 1-10, 3-2, 3-4, 4-39, 4-134 Unit .. 1-1, 1-3, 1-4, 1-11, 1-13, 3-2, 3-3, 3-8, 4-41, 4-138, 4-139
sample syringe...........................1-8 sample tube ................. 1-4, 1-5, 1-8
Analyzing.......... ........................ 1-1
sample volume................. 8, 9, 4-42 Operation................................... 1-1 Sampling.................................. 5-44 Output ....................................... 1-1 scroll bar .................................. 1-20 second reagent ................1-12, 4-43
upper limit...4-49, 4-50, 4-50, 4-78, 4-136, 4-137
secondary wavelength..............4-42
urine .............................................. 8
serum ............................................ 8
used-cuvettes bucket ................. 3-3
short-cut button.......4-1, 4-11, 4-13, 4-38
username ................................... 3-4
single-reagent ...... 1-12, 4-41, 4-43, 4-46, 4-63, 4-64
vertical position..1-4, 1-5, 1-9, 1-10
surplus antigen..... 4-43, 4-44, 4-45, 4-137
volume (180~450 μl) of the first reagent..................................4-42
surplus substrate ...................... 4-45
volume (30~450 μl) of the second reagen...................................4-42
Syringe reagent .......................................1-8
C-4
Index waste tank....................3-3, 3-4, 3-8
Waiting ............................... 3-6, 3-7
Weight............ ........................... 2-1
wash well.................1-8, 1-11, 1-12
Worklist Status ..... 4-14, 4-18, 4-19, 4-21, 4-25
Waste ......................................... 1-4
C-5
P/N: BA34-20-63687 (1.8)
